WO2018033136A1 - Cell handover method, user equipment, and network device - Google Patents

Cell handover method, user equipment, and network device Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2018033136A1
WO2018033136A1 PCT/CN2017/098026 CN2017098026W WO2018033136A1 WO 2018033136 A1 WO2018033136 A1 WO 2018033136A1 CN 2017098026 W CN2017098026 W CN 2017098026W WO 2018033136 A1 WO2018033136 A1 WO 2018033136A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
network device
measurement
reference signal
message
handover
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2017/098026
Other languages
French (fr)
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
耿婷婷
曾清海
Original Assignee
华为技术有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 华为技术有限公司 filed Critical 华为技术有限公司
Publication of WO2018033136A1 publication Critical patent/WO2018033136A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W36/00Hand-off or reselection arrangements
    • H04W36/0005Control or signalling for completing the hand-off
    • H04W36/005Control or signalling for completing the hand-off involving radio access media independent information, e.g. MIH [Media independent Hand-off]
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W36/00Hand-off or reselection arrangements
    • H04W36/0005Control or signalling for completing the hand-off
    • H04W36/0011Control or signalling for completing the hand-off for data sessions of end-to-end connection
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W24/00Supervisory, monitoring or testing arrangements
    • H04W24/10Scheduling measurement reports ; Arrangements for measurement reports
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W36/00Hand-off or reselection arrangements
    • H04W36/34Reselection control
    • H04W36/38Reselection control by fixed network equipment
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W72/00Local resource management
    • H04W72/20Control channels or signalling for resource management
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W72/00Local resource management
    • H04W72/20Control channels or signalling for resource management
    • H04W72/23Control channels or signalling for resource management in the downlink direction of a wireless link, i.e. towards a terminal

Definitions

  • the embodiments of the present application relate to the field of communications, and in particular, to a method, a user equipment, and a network device for cell handover.
  • UE User Equipment
  • mobility management of the UE is required. For example, when the UE moves from the coverage of the source cell to the coverage of the target cell, it is necessary to complete the handover between the cells in time.
  • the design idea of mobility management is a network-oriented design idea (UE follows network). Taking the UE in the active state as an example, in order to implement the mobility management of the UE, each cell in the network sends a downlink reference signal for measurement by the UE. The UE reports the measurement result to the network side in the form of a measurement report. The network performs a handover decision based on the measurement report of the UE, and switches the UE to a cell with a good signal condition for data transmission.
  • UE network-oriented design idea
  • UCNC UE Centric No Cell
  • the embodiments of the present application provide a method, a user equipment, and a network device for cell handover, which can solve handover between a network-centric system and a user-centric system.
  • a method for cell handover including:
  • the first network device sends a time-frequency resource configuration of the uplink reference signal to the second network device, so that the second network device forwards the time-frequency resource configuration of the uplink reference signal to the UE;
  • the first network device in the embodiment of the present application can send the time-frequency resource configuration of the DCID and the uplink reference signal to the second network device, so that the second network device can be used to instruct the UE to send the uplink reference signal. Further, the first network device may instruct the UE to use the first network device as a serving cell by using the handover indication message, and perform data communication with the node on the first network side, so as to complete the handover of the second network device to the first network device. To ensure the continuity of the UE's business.
  • the method before the first network device sends the handover indication message to the second network device, the method further includes:
  • the first network device Sending, by the first network device, a measurement indication message to the first node, instructing the first node to measure an uplink reference signal sent by the UE, where the measurement indication message carries the DCID and/or the uplink reference signal Time-frequency resource configuration;
  • the first network device allocates the second node to the UE according to the first measurement report of the first node.
  • the first network device assigning the second node to the UE, including:
  • the first network device allocates the second node to the UE.
  • the determining, by the first network device, whether the measurement result carried by the first measurement report of the first node meets a handover threshold includes:
  • the first network device determines whether the measurement result carried by the first measurement report of the first node within a preset duration satisfies the handover threshold.
  • the first network device receives the preset duration and/or handover threshold from the second network device.
  • the method before the first network device sends the DCID to the second network device of the current serving cell of the UE, the method further includes:
  • the time-frequency resource configuration of the DCID and the uplink reference signal is included in a measurement response corresponding to the measurement request.
  • the first network device may send a measurement response to the second network device, the measurement response including a DCID and a time-frequency resource configuration of the uplink reference signal.
  • the handover indication message further includes:
  • the first network device is configured to transmit resource information of the UE, and/or the new ID that the first network device allocates to the UE.
  • the first network device Before the network device sends the handover indication message, the method further includes:
  • the first network device sends the TA value to the UE.
  • the sending, by the first network device, the TA value to the UE includes:
  • the first network device transmits the TA value to the second network device such that the second network device forwards the TA value to the UE.
  • a method for cell handover including:
  • the user equipment UE receives the first radio resource control RRC configuration message sent by the second network device of the current serving cell, where the first RRC configuration message includes a dedicated connection identifier DCID, and the DCID is used by the first network device to identify the UE;
  • the UE performs data transmission with the second node according to the handover command.
  • the UE in the embodiment of the present application can send the uplink reference information according to the time-frequency resource configuration of the second network device to send the DCID and the uplink reference signal, and further complete the handover of the second network device to the first network device based on the handover command, and ensure The continuity of the business.
  • the method before the receiving, by the UE, the first RRC configuration message sent by the second network device of the current serving cell, the method further includes:
  • the UE in the service range of the second network device performs heterogeneous system detection
  • the UE generates a second measurement report according to the result of the detection by the different system, where the second measurement report includes a cell ID of the first network where the first network device is located;
  • the UE sends the second measurement report to the second network device.
  • the performing, by the UE, the performing the system detection includes:
  • the UE periodically performs the heterogeneous system detection.
  • the triggering condition may be that the signal quality of the second network device detected by the UE is lower than a preset threshold.
  • the performing, by the UE, the performing the system detection includes:
  • the UE performs the heterogeneous system measurement according to the measurement control message.
  • the performing, by the UE, the performing the system detection includes:
  • the UE performs the inter-system detection, and detects at least one of the primary synchronization signal PSS, the secondary synchronization signal SSS, the downlink reference signal of the first network, and the system information SI sent by the first node in the first network. item.
  • the method before the sending, by the UE, the uplink reference signal according to the first RRC configuration message and the second RRC configuration message, the method further includes:
  • the UE receives a TA value sent by the first network device.
  • the TA value is included in the second RRC configuration message.
  • the method before the sending, by the UE, the uplink reference signal according to the first RRC configuration message and the second RRC configuration message, the method further includes:
  • the UE receives a TA value sent by the second network device.
  • the first RRC configuration message and the second RRC configuration message are the same message.
  • a method for cell handover including:
  • the second network device receives the time-frequency resource configuration of the dedicated connection identifier DCID and the uplink reference signal sent by the first network device, where the DCID is used by the first network device to identify the user equipment UE;
  • the second network device sends a first radio resource control RRC configuration message to the UE, where the first RRC configuration message includes the DCID;
  • the second network device sends a second RRC configuration message to the UE, where the second RRC configuration message includes a time-frequency resource configuration of an uplink reference signal, so that the UE is configured according to the first RRC configuration message and the The second RRC configuration message sends an uplink reference signal.
  • the UE that is in the service range of the second network device can be assisted by the second network device to complete the handover of the second network device to the first network device, and can include the continuity of the service of the UE.
  • the method further includes:
  • the second network device transmits the determined third TA value to the UE.
  • the method further includes:
  • the second network device sends the TA value to the UE.
  • the TA value is included in the second RRC configuration message.
  • the first RRC configuration message and the second RRC configuration message are the same message.
  • the method before the receiving, by the second network device, the TA value sent by the first network device, the method further includes:
  • the second network device sends a timing advance TA test command to the UE to instruct the UE to send a TA test message to the first network device.
  • the second network device receives the time-frequency resource configuration of the DCID and the uplink reference signal sent by the first network device, including:
  • the second network device receives a measurement response sent by the first network device, where the measurement response includes a time-frequency resource configuration of the DCID and an uplink reference signal.
  • the measurement request includes a handover threshold, or the measurement request includes a handover threshold and a preset duration.
  • the method before the second network device receives the second measurement report sent by the UE, the method further includes:
  • the second network device sends a measurement control message to the UE to instruct the UE to perform an inter-system measurement.
  • the method further includes:
  • the second network device receives the handover indication information that is sent by the first network device, where the handover indication message includes an identifier of the second node in the first network where the first network device is located;
  • the second network device sends a handover command to the UE according to the handover indication information, where the handover command includes an identifier of the second node, where the handover command is used to indicate the UE and the second node. Data transfer.
  • the handover indication message further includes:
  • the first network device is configured to transmit resource information of the UE, and/or the new ID that the first network device allocates to the UE.
  • a network device is provided, where the network device is a first network device, and includes:
  • a sending unit configured to send, to the second network device that is currently serving the cell of the user equipment UE, a dedicated connection identifier DCID, so that the second network device forwards the DCID to the UE, where the DCID is used by the The first network device identifies the UE;
  • the method is further configured to send, to the second network device, a handover indication message, where the handover indication message includes an identifier of a second node in a first network where the first network device is located, so that the UE and the second The node performs data transmission.
  • the network device is capable of implementing the method for cell handover described in the foregoing first aspect and various implementation manners thereof.
  • the receiving unit and the processing unit are further included.
  • the sending unit is further configured to send the measurement indication message to the first node, where the first node is configured to measure an uplink reference signal sent by the UE, where the measurement indication message carries the DCID and the uplink reference signal Time-frequency resource configuration;
  • the receiving unit is configured to receive a first measurement report sent by the first node, where the first measurement report carries a measurement result of the uplink reference signal sent by the UE;
  • the processing unit is configured to allocate the second node to the UE according to the first measurement report of the first node.
  • the processing unit is specifically configured to: Determining whether the measurement result carried by the first measurement report of the first node meets a handover threshold; if the measurement result carried by the first measurement report of the first node meets the handover threshold, the UE is Allocating the second node.
  • the processing unit is configured to: determine the measurement result carried by the first measurement report of the first node within a preset duration Whether the switching threshold is met.
  • the receiving unit is further configured to: receive the preset duration from the second network device.
  • the receiving unit is further configured to: receive the handover threshold from the second network device.
  • the method further includes: a receiving unit, configured to: receive a measurement request sent by the second network device, where the DCID and the uplink reference signal are The time-frequency resource configuration is included in the measurement response corresponding to the measurement request.
  • the handover indication message further includes: transmission resource information configured by the first network device for the UE, and/or the first A new ID assigned by the network device to the UE.
  • the receiving unit and the processing unit are further included.
  • the sending unit is further configured to send a TA test instruction to the second network device, so that the second network device instructs the UE to send a TA test message;
  • the receiving unit is configured to receive the TA test message sent by the UE;
  • the processing unit is configured to determine a TA value according to the TA test message
  • the sending unit is further configured to send the TA value to the UE.
  • the sending unit is specifically configured to: send the TA value to the second network device, so that the second network device The TA value is forwarded to the UE.
  • a network device comprising: a processor, a memory, and a transceiver.
  • the memory is for storing code
  • the processor is for executing code in the memory, and when the code is executed, the processor can implement the method for cell switching described in the foregoing first aspect and various implementation manners.
  • a computer readable storage medium in a sixth aspect, storing a program causing a network device to perform the first aspect described above, and any of its various implementations for The method of cell handover.
  • a system chip including an input interface, an output interface, at least one processor, and a memory, and the input interface, the output interface, the processor, and the memory are connected by a bus.
  • the processor is operative to execute code in the memory, the processor implementing the first aspect described above, and any of its various implementations being performed by a first network device when the code is executed method.
  • a user equipment including:
  • a receiving unit configured to receive a first radio resource control RRC configuration message sent by a second network device of the current serving cell, where the first RRC configuration message includes a dedicated connection identifier DCID, where the DCID is used by the first network device identifier UE;
  • the receiving unit is further configured to receive a second RRC configuration message sent by the second network device, where the second RRC configuration message includes a time-frequency resource configuration of an uplink reference signal;
  • a sending unit configured to send an uplink reference signal according to the first RRC configuration message and the second RRC configuration message
  • the receiving unit is further configured to receive a handover command sent by the second network device, where the handover command includes an identifier of a second node that is allocated by the first network device to the UE;
  • a processing unit configured to perform data transmission with the second node according to the switching command.
  • the UE of the eighth aspect is capable of implementing the method for cell handover described in the foregoing second aspect and various implementation manners thereof.
  • the processing unit is further configured to: perform an inter-system detection; and generate a second measurement report according to the result of the different system detection, where The second measurement report includes a cell ID of the first network where the first network device is located, and the sending unit is further configured to send the second measurement report to the second network device.
  • the processing unit performs the detection of the different system, specifically, when the trigger condition is met, performing the different system detection; or performing periodically The heterogeneous system detects.
  • the triggering condition is: the signal quality of the second network device detected by the UE is lower than a preset threshold.
  • the receiving unit is further configured to receive a measurement control message that is sent by the second network device, where the processing unit is specifically configured to The measurement control message performs the different system measurement.
  • the processing unit is configured to: perform an inter-system detection, and detect a primary synchronization signal sent by the first node in the first network. At least one of a PSS, a secondary synchronization signal SSS, a downlink reference signal of the first network, and system information SI.
  • the sending unit is further configured to send a timing advance TA test message to the first network device, where the receiving unit is further configured to receive The TA value sent by the first network device.
  • the TA value is included in the second RRC configuration message.
  • the receiving unit is further configured to receive a TA value sent by the second network device.
  • the first RRC configuration message and the second RRC configuration message are the same message.
  • a UE comprising: a processor, a memory, and a transceiver.
  • the memory is for storing code
  • the processor is for executing code in the memory, and when the code is executed, the processor can implement the method for cell switching described in the foregoing second aspect and various implementation manners.
  • a computer readable storage medium storing a program, the program causing a UE to perform the second aspect described above, and any one of its various implementations for a cell The method of switching.
  • a system chip in an eleventh aspect, includes an input interface, an output interface, and at least one a processor, a memory, the input interface, the output interface, the processor, and the memory are connected by a bus, the processor is configured to execute code in the memory, when the code is executed,
  • the processor implements the method of the second aspect described above, and any of its various implementations, performed by the UE.
  • a network device where the network device is a second network device, including:
  • a receiving unit configured to receive a time-frequency resource configuration of a dedicated connection identifier DCID and an uplink reference signal sent by the first network device, where the DCID is used by the first network device to identify the user equipment UE;
  • a sending unit configured to send a first radio resource control RRC configuration message to the UE, where the first RRC configuration message includes the DCID;
  • the sending unit is further configured to send a second RRC configuration message to the UE, where the second RRC configuration message includes a time-frequency resource configuration of an uplink reference signal, so that the UE is configured according to the first RRC configuration message and The second RRC configuration message sends an uplink reference signal.
  • the network device of the twelfth aspect is capable of implementing the method for cell handover described in the foregoing third aspect and various implementation manners thereof.
  • the method further includes: a processing unit, configured to perform, according to a first time advance between the second network device and the UE a quantity TA value and a second TA value between the second network device and the first network device, determining a third TA value between the UE and the first network device; the sending unit, further And for transmitting the determined third TA value to the UE.
  • the receiving unit is further configured to receive a TA value sent by the first network device, where the sending unit is further used to The TA value is sent to the UE.
  • the TA value is included in the second RRC configuration message.
  • the first RRC configuration message and the second RRC configuration message are the same message.
  • the sending unit is further configured to send a timing advance TA test instruction to the UE, to indicate that the UE is to the first
  • the network device sends a TA test message.
  • the receiving unit is further configured to receive a second measurement report that is sent by the UE, where the second measurement report includes the first network device a cell ID of the first network, where the sending unit is further configured to send a measurement request to the first network device, where the receiving unit is further configured to receive a measurement response sent by the first network device,
  • the measurement response includes a time-frequency resource configuration of the DCID and the uplink reference signal.
  • the measurement request includes a handover threshold, or the measurement request includes a handover threshold and a preset duration.
  • the sending unit is further configured to send a measurement control message to the UE to instruct the UE to perform an inter-system measurement.
  • the receiving unit is further configured to receive, by the first network device, handover indication information, where the handover indication message includes the An identifier of the second node in the first network where the network device is located; the sending unit is further configured to send a handover command to the UE according to the handover indication information, where the handover command includes the second node Identifying, the switching command is used to indicate the The UE performs data transmission with the second node.
  • the handover indication message further includes: transmission resource information configured by the first network device for the UE, and/or The new ID assigned by the first network device to the UE.
  • a network device comprising: a processor, a memory, and a transceiver.
  • the memory is for storing code
  • the processor is for executing code in the memory, and when the code is executed, the processor can implement the method for cell switching described in the foregoing third aspect and various implementation manners.
  • a computer readable storage medium in a fourteenth aspect, storing a program causing a network device to perform the third aspect described above, and any of the various implementations thereof The method of cell handover.
  • a system chip includes an input interface, an output interface, at least one processor, and a memory, and the input interface, the output interface, the processor, and the memory pass through the bus Connected, the processor is operative to execute code in the memory, when the code is executed, the processor implements the third aspect described above, and any of its various implementations are performed by a second network device Methods.
  • a communication system comprising a network device, the network device comprising the first network device according to any one of the foregoing fourth to seventh aspects, and/ Or the second network device according to any one of the twelfth to fifteenth aspects.
  • the communication system further includes a user equipment, where the user equipment is any one of the foregoing eighth to eleventh aspects UE.
  • the first network device may be an NR controller
  • the second network device may be a base station (such as an eNB) in the LTE.
  • the first network where the first network device is located may be an NR.
  • the first node may be a TP in the first TPG
  • the second node may be a TP in the second TPG.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of a super cell according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 3 is a schematic flowchart of a handover of a UE from LTE to NR according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 4 is another schematic flowchart of a handover of a UE from LTE to NR according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 5 is another schematic flowchart of a handover of a UE from LTE to NR according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 6 is another schematic flowchart of a handover of a UE from LTE to NR according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 7 is another schematic flowchart of a handover of a UE from LTE to NR according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 8 is a schematic flowchart of a handover of a UE from NR to LTE according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 9 is another schematic flowchart of a handover of a UE from NR to LTE in an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 10 is a schematic flowchart of a method for cell reselection according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 11 is a schematic flowchart of cell handover in the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 12 is another schematic flowchart of cell handover in the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 13 is another schematic flowchart of cell handover in the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 14 is a structural block diagram of a network device according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 15 is another structural block diagram of a network device according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 16 is a structural block diagram of a UE according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 17 is another structural block diagram of a UE according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 18 is a structural block diagram of a network device according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 19 is another structural block diagram of a network device according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 20 is a schematic structural diagram of a system chip according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 21 is a schematic structural diagram of a system chip according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 22 is a schematic structural diagram of a system chip according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • GSM Global System of Mobile communication
  • CDMA Code Division Multiple Access
  • WCDMA Wideband Code Division Multiple Access
  • GPRS General Packet Radio Service
  • LTE Long Term Evolution
  • LTE-A Advanced Long Term Evolution
  • UMTS Universal Mobile Telecommunication System
  • the user equipment includes but is not limited to a mobile station (Mobile Station, MS), a mobile terminal (Mobile Terminal), a mobile telephone (Mobile Telephone), a mobile phone (handset). And portable devices, etc., the user equipment can communicate with one or more core networks via a Radio Access Network (RAN), for example, the user equipment can be a mobile phone (or "cellular"
  • RAN Radio Access Network
  • the user equipment can be a mobile phone (or "cellular"
  • the telephone device, the computer with wireless communication function, etc., the user equipment can also be a mobile device that is portable, pocket-sized, handheld, built-in, or in-vehicle.
  • a new radio (NR) system which may also be called a Next Radio system or a next-generation network, may be a hyper cell.
  • a hyper cell may be used.
  • the hyper cell ID is configured, and the hyper cell may include multiple nodes of the same frequency and/or different frequency.
  • the node may be a transmission point (TP).
  • TP transmission point
  • the hyper cell may also be used.
  • the TP may include only one TP.
  • the hyper cell may include multiple cells.
  • only one cell may be included in the hyper cell. It can be understood that the ID of the TP (or cell) in the hyper cell can be consistent with the ID of the hyper cell, or can be configured separately.
  • the common information of the TP in the hyper cell may be configured to be consistent.
  • the content of the channel transmitted by the channel such as the synchronization channel, the downlink reference channel, and the broadcast channel is the same, and the UE moves in the hyper cell due to the hyper cell.
  • the public information of the TP is the same, and the UE has no perception of the change of the serving cell.
  • the UE does not need to measure the downlink reference signal sent by each cell in the hyper cell. Instead, the UE sends an uplink reference signal, and the network side measures the uplink reference signal of the UE, and selects one or more TPs for the UE based on the measurement result. Data transfer.
  • the task of measuring the uplink reference signal and the TP handover can be completed by the network side, and the UE is not aware of the TP transformation as much as possible, which is equivalent to introducing the "no cell” working mode, so that not only the working mode is introduced, but not only the "no cell” is introduced. It can ensure the continuity of services, and can reduce the overhead of air interface signaling. The UE does not need to undertake heavy measurement tasks, and the design complexity is also reduced accordingly.
  • the UE does not perform downlink measurement, but is based on the UE uplink reference signal to the UE and The link quality of the network is measured and evaluated. Therefore, in general, the NR system does not need to frequently transmit downlink reference signals, which not only reduces inter-cell interference, but also further improves network resource utilization.
  • the NR controller allocates a Dedicated Connection Identity (DCID) to the UE, and the super cell can identify the UE according to the DCID. That is, the NR controller can uniquely identify the UE based on the DCID.
  • the TP in the super cell may provide a data communication service for the UE based on the DCID; the TP in the super cell may also identify and measure the uplink reference signal sent by the UE based on the DCID.
  • the DCID may be simply referred to as a Dedicated Identity (DID), or may be referred to as a Dedicated User Identity (DUI), which may be a C-RNTI, a hyper cell ID, a TP ID, a cell ID, and a newly defined Any one of IDs and the like or a combination of any of them.
  • DID Dedicated Identity
  • DAI Dedicated User Identity
  • the UE may be provided with mobility management by a new radio controller (NR controller), which may be an independent network element on the access network side, or a logical network element, or a centralized network.
  • a new radio controller (NR controller)
  • the NR controller may be in the same entity as the TP, such as an access network device, and the TP may be a transmitting and receiving unit of the access network device; or the NR controller may be a TP, and the TP may be Or not the TP in the TP set of the data transmission service provided by the UE.
  • the NR controller can directly send signaling to the UE.
  • the specific type of the node is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • it may be a normal base station (such as a NodeB or an eNB), may be a radio remote module, may be a pico base station, or may be a relay. ), which may be a distributed network unit, may be a TP, may be a DU and a TP, or any other wireless access device.
  • the node may have all or part of the layer 2 protocol stack function, or the node may have all or part of the layer 2 protocol and the physical layer protocol stack function.
  • the Layer 2 protocol may include at least one of a Packet Data Convergence Protocol (PDCP), a Radio Link Control (RLC), and a Medium Access Control (MAC). That is, the layer two protocol may be PDCP, or RLC, or MAC, or PDCP and RLC, or PDCP and MAC, or RLC and MAC, or PDCP and RLC and MAC.
  • the node may be a Transmission Reception Point (TRP) or a Transmission Point (TP) having all or part of the Layer 2 protocol, or the node may be a receiving point having all or part of the Layer 2 protocol and the physical layer protocol. Or transmission point.
  • TRP Transmission Reception Point
  • TP Transmission Point
  • the node is a TP as an example. It can be understood that if the node is a DU and a TP, the NR controller interacts with the DU, and then the DU further interacts with the TP, that is, the NR controller and the TP. The interaction needs to be done through the DU.
  • NR is a user-centric system
  • how to implement handover becomes a technical bottleneck when the UE moves between a network-centric system and a user-centric system.
  • LTE LTE
  • FIG. 2 it is a schematic diagram of a positional relationship between LTE and NR. It can be understood that the LTE is only schematic, and may be other network-centric systems, which are not limited herein.
  • the UE will switch between LTE and NR, and the UE expects to be able to provide continuous service.
  • the UE When the UE moves from LTE to NR, whether to camp on the NR system is determined by the NR system's measurement quality of the UE uplink SRS, and the UE may configure periodic SRS in LTE. In order to reduce unnecessary waste, it is preferable to The UE starts transmitting SRS only when the NR system covers; in addition, the SRS transmission configuration requires LTE and NR system interaction.
  • the UE When the UE moves from the NR to the LTE, the UE needs to be configured to enable the downlink measurement and reporting function in time; if the NR system does not support the measurement report on the UE side, it needs to interact with the LTE.
  • FIG. 3 is a schematic flowchart of a handover of a UE from LTE to NR according to an embodiment of the present application. It should be understood that FIG. 3 illustrates detailed communication steps or operations applied to switch from LTE to NR, but these steps or operations are merely examples, and other embodiments of the present application may perform other operations or various operations in FIG. Deformation. Moreover, the various steps in FIG. 3 may be performed in a different order than that presented in FIG. 3, and it is possible that not all operations in FIG. 3 are to be performed.
  • the UE 10, the eNB 20, the NR controller 30, and the TP 40 are shown in FIG. 3, where the TP 40 may be multiple.
  • the method shown in Figure 3 can include:
  • the UE 10 performs heterogeneous system detection.
  • the UE 10 is initially in the serving cell of the LTE, and the initial serving base station is the eNB 20.
  • the UE 10 may perform inter-system detection periodically, or the UE 10 may perform inter-system detection when the trigger condition is met.
  • the UE 10 may perform S102 according to the configuration of the eNB 20. Specifically, before S102, the UE 10 receives the measurement control message (or base station configuration message) sent by the eNB 20. And in S102, the UE 10 performs the heterogeneous system measurement according to the measurement control message (or the base station configuration message).
  • the UE 20 may periodically perform an inter-system measurement.
  • the UE 10 may receive a measurement control message sent by the eNB 20, the measurement control message instructing the UE 20 to perform the inter-system measurement periodically; further, the UE 10 may perform the hetero-system measurement according to the measurement control message.
  • the measurement control message can include a cycle size or the like.
  • this embodiment can be applied to the scenes shown in (a) of FIG. 2 and (b) of FIG. 2.
  • the UE 20 may perform an inter-system measurement when the trigger condition is met.
  • the UE 10 may receive a measurement control message sent by the eNB 20, where the measurement control message indicates that the UE 20 performs a trigger condition for the inter-system measurement; further, the UE 10 may perform the hetero-system measurement according to the measurement control message.
  • the triggering condition may be that the signal quality of the eNB 20 detected by the UE 10 is lower than a preset threshold.
  • the measurement control message can include the size of the threshold and the like. For example, this embodiment can be applied to the scenes shown in (b) of FIG. 2 and (c) of FIG. 2.
  • the eNB 20 may send the measurement control message in the form of broadcast or unicast.
  • the eNB 20 may send a measurement control message to one or more UEs located at the edge of the eNB 20 service range based on the location of the UE.
  • the UE 10 performing the inter-system measurement means that the UE 10 detects the NR information and the like.
  • the UE 10 detects the NR according to the configuration, and finds a Primary Synchronization Signal (PSS), a Secondary Synchronization Signal (SSS), an NR downlink reference signal, and System Information (SI) of the NR TP transmission. At least one of the others, and reading the NR information based on the signals found.
  • PSS Primary Synchronization Signal
  • SSS Secondary Synchronization Signal
  • SI System Information
  • the NR information includes an NR cell ID.
  • the NR cell ID may be the aforementioned hyper cell ID, TP ID, or other identifiers or physical cell identifiers (Physical) for uniquely identifying the NR cell. Cell ID) and the like, this application is not limited thereto.
  • the NR cell ID may also be referred to as a global NR cell ID.
  • the NR information may further include a bandwidth and/or a frequency band of the NR system and the like.
  • the UE 10 sends a second measurement report to the eNB 20.
  • the UE 10 can generate a second measurement report according to the result of the different system measurement. And then in S104, the second measurement report is sent to the eNB 20.
  • the second measurement report may include NR information, and further, the second measurement report may further The signal quality of the current eNB 20 detected by the UE 10 is included.
  • the signal quality of the current eNB 20 is the signal quality of the current serving cell, or may be referred to as the signal quality of the current LTE cell.
  • the second measurement report includes the NR cell ID.
  • the second measurement report may further include a bandwidth and/or a frequency band of the NR system; optionally, the second measurement report may further include a signal quality of the current serving cell (ie, a cell of the LTE); optionally, the second The measurement report may also include the signal quality of the NR cell.
  • a new heterogeneous system measurement report trigger mechanism or a different system discovery mechanism is introduced, that is, only the detection of the existence of the heterogeneous system triggers the heterogeneous system measurement report. It is not necessary to trigger the heterogeneous measurement report to trigger the heterogeneous system measurement report, as in the legacy mechanism, where the quality of the different system must meet the threshold.
  • the trigger mechanism of the detection of the different system may be similar to legacy.
  • the UE detects that the current LTE quality is lower than a certain threshold, the UE detects the NR, or the LTE configures the UE to periodically detect the NR, or the LTE according to the LTE.
  • the location information of the UE configures the UE to start detecting NR and the like.
  • the eNB 20 sends a measurement request to the NR controller 30.
  • the eNB 20 When the eNB 20 receives the second measurement report of the UE 10, it can learn that the UE 10 has detected the adjacent NR cell, and sends a measurement request to the NR controller 30.
  • the NR controller 30 is configured to transmit an uplink reference signal or the like to the UE 10.
  • the measurement request may also be referred to as a measurement configuration request or a measurement configuration request message.
  • the measurement request may further include location information of the UE 10.
  • the measurement request may further include a handover threshold, or the measurement request may further include a handover threshold and a preset duration.
  • a handover threshold or the measurement request may further include a handover threshold and a preset duration.
  • the NR controller 30 transmits a measurement response to the eNB 20.
  • the measurement response can include a DCID.
  • the DCID is assigned by the NR controller 30 to the UE 10 for the NR controller 30 to uniquely identify the UE 10.
  • the measurement response may further include a time-frequency resource configuration of the uplink reference signal.
  • the UE 10 can then send an uplink reference signal according to the time-frequency resource configuration.
  • the measurement response may also be referred to as a measurement configuration response or a measurement configuration response message.
  • the NR controller 30 may perform the NR configuration according to the measurement request, and then send the DCID (or the time-frequency resource configuration of the DCID and the uplink reference signal) to the eNB 20 by using the measurement response in the form of NR RRC.
  • the node is a TP. If the node is a DU and a TP, the interaction between the NR controller and the TP in the embodiment of the present application may be that the NR controller 30 interacts through the DU and the TP, that is, the NR controller and the DU directly interact, and then the DU and the TP interact. It can be understood that when the TPG includes multiple TPs, the TPs in the TPG may belong to the same or different DUs.
  • the NR controller 30 sends measurement indication information to the first transmission point group (TPG) to indicate that the TP in the first TPG measures the uplink reference signal sent by the UE.
  • TPG transmission point group
  • the first TPG includes one or more TPs.
  • the measurement indication information may include a time-frequency resource configuration of the DCID and the uplink reference signal.
  • the measurement indication information may further include a measurement threshold.
  • the first TPG may be a collection of all outermost TPs of the hyper cell.
  • the first TPG may be a set of the outermost TP of the hyper cell where the UE is located. That is, in S110, the NR controller 30 may determine the first TPG according to the location information of the UE, and then transmit the measurement indication information to the first TPG.
  • the measurement indication information may further include at least one of the following measurement configuration parameters: a carried measurement identifier, a measurement event name, a measurement interval, a measurement report reporting mode, a measurement reporting condition, and a measurement parameter.
  • a set of measurement configuration parameters may be configured for each DCID (or each UE), or a set of measurement configuration parameters may be configured for all DCIDs (or all UEs) in the super cell.
  • the measurement configuration parameter may include at least one of a reception quality of the uplink reference signal, a received power of the uplink reference signal, a signal to noise ratio, a signal to interference and noise ratio, a path loss, and the like.
  • the measurement configuration parameter may also include at least one of the thresholds of the above various parameters.
  • the measurement report reporting mode may include at least one of an event-triggered reporting mode, a periodic reporting mode, an event-triggered reporting, and a periodic reporting mode.
  • the event-triggered reporting mode may be: when the TP measured uplink reference signal meets the threshold in the measurement configuration parameter, the TP sends a measurement report to the NR controller.
  • the periodic reporting mode may refer to the TP periodically sending a measurement report to the NR controller.
  • the TP After the NR controller configures the measurement configuration parameter of the uplink reference signal for the TP, the TP can measure the uplink reference signal sent by the UE according to the measurement configuration parameter, and report the measurement result to the NR controller according to the measurement reporting mode.
  • the measurement indication information may indicate that the TP performs the intra-frequency measurement, and may also instruct the TP to perform the inter-frequency measurement.
  • the NR controller may send the measurement indication information of the intra-frequency measurement to the TP, or may send the measurement indication information of the inter-frequency measurement to the TP.
  • the frequency of the TP is F1
  • the frequency at which the UE sends the uplink reference signal is F2
  • the NR controller can instruct the TP to perform the inter-frequency measurement, that is, the TP is configured to measure the uplink reference signal sent by the UE on the F2.
  • the NR controller may also instruct the UE to send an uplink reference signal at the working frequency of the TP, that is, the F1 frequency band, and then instruct the TP to perform the same frequency measurement. In this way, the TP only needs to measure the uplink reference signal in its own working frequency band. It should be understood that the above two measurement methods may be used alone or in combination, and the embodiment of the present application does not specifically limit this.
  • the eNB 20 sends a first RRC configuration message to the UE 10.
  • the first RRC configuration message includes a DCID. If the measurement response includes a time-frequency resource configuration of the DCID and the uplink reference signal, the first RRC configuration message includes a DCDR and a time-frequency resource configuration of the uplink reference signal.
  • the eNB 20 may send the first RRC configuration message to the UE 10 in a tunnel manner.
  • the eNB 20 may configure the UE to send the time-frequency resource of the uplink reference signal, and send the time-frequency resource configuration of the uplink reference signal to NR controller 30 and UE 10.
  • the eNB 20 determines the time-frequency resource configuration of the uplink reference signal, and transmits the time-frequency resource configuration of the uplink reference signal to the NR controller 30 by measuring the configuration indication information. After that, the NR controller 30 performs S110 again. And in S112, the first RRC configuration message includes a time-frequency resource configuration of the DCID and the uplink reference signal.
  • the first RRC configuration message in S112 includes a DCID.
  • the eNB 20 determines the time-frequency resource configuration of the uplink reference signal, and transmits the time-frequency resource configuration of the uplink reference signal to the NR controller 30 by measuring the configuration indication information. After that, the NR controller 30 performs S110 again. And after S112, the eNB 20 may send a second RRC configuration message to the UE 10, where the second RRC configuration message includes a time-frequency resource configuration of the uplink reference signal.
  • the eNB 20 can send the time-frequency resource configuration of the DCID and the uplink reference signal to the UE 10 in one RRC configuration message; or the eNB 20 can respectively set the DCID and the uplink reference signal in two different RRC configuration messages.
  • the frequency resource configuration is sent to the UE 10.
  • the UE 10 sends an uplink reference signal.
  • the name, the type, and the format of the signal for the network measurement sent by the UE are not specifically limited.
  • the UE sends the uplink reference signal as an example, but the embodiment of the present application is not limited thereto, for example, It may be a newly introduced tracking signal for tracking the location of the UE, or may use a Sounding Reference Signal (SRS).
  • SRS Sounding Reference Signal
  • the UE sends an uplink reference signal according to the DCID and the time-frequency resource configuration of the uplink reference signal.
  • the UE 10 may send the uplink reference signal by using the time-frequency resource according to the time-frequency resource configuration of the uplink reference signal.
  • the uplink reference signal may be an SRS. In one embodiment, the uplink reference signal can be transmitted periodically.
  • the TP in the first TPG can measure the uplink reference signal sent by the UE 10 according to the measurement indication in S110.
  • the NR controller 30 receives the first measurement report sent by the TP 40 in the first TPG.
  • the first measurement report may include a measurement result of the uplink reference signal, and the specific measurement result type corresponds to the measurement configuration parameter in S110.
  • the measurement result is signal strength information as an example.
  • the first measurement report carries the signal strength information of the uplink reference signal sent by the UE 10 detected by the TP 40.
  • the TP in the first TPG can determine the signal strength information of the uplink reference signal by detecting an uplink reference signal sent by the UE.
  • the signal strength information in different first measurement reports may be unequal.
  • the first measurement report sent by the TP1 includes the signal strength information of the uplink reference signal detected by the TP1
  • the first measurement report sent by the TP2 includes the signal strength information of the uplink reference signal detected by the TP2.
  • each TP in the first TPG sends a first measurement report.
  • each TP in the first TPG capable of detecting the uplink reference signal sends the first measurement report.
  • a portion of the TPs in the first TPG sends a first measurement report. For example, if the signal strength information of the uplink reference signal detected by the first TP in the first TPG is greater than or equal to the measurement threshold, the first TP sends the first measurement report. For example, if the signal strength information of the uplink reference signal detected by the first TP in the first TPG is less than the measurement threshold, the first TP does not send the first measurement report.
  • the measurement threshold may be predefined in each TP; or the measurement threshold may be configured by the NR controller 30, for example, the measurement indication message in S110 may carry the measurement threshold.
  • the NR controller 30 allocates a second TPG to the UE 10.
  • the NR controller 30 may determine whether the signal strength information carried by the first measurement report of the TP in the first TPG satisfies a handover threshold; if the first measurement report of the TP in the first TPG is carried The signal strength information satisfies the handover threshold, and the NR controller 30 allocates the second TPG to the UE 10, and the second TPG includes one or more TPs.
  • the switching threshold is greater than the measurement threshold described above.
  • the meeting the switching threshold may refer to Greater than or equal to the switching threshold.
  • the TP (such as the first TP) is added to the second TPG. in. If the signal strength information carried by the first measurement report of a TP (eg, the second TP) in the first TPG is less than the handover threshold, the TP (eg, the second TP) is not added to the second TPG.
  • the NR controller 30 can select at least one TP as the second TPG from the first TPG according to the handover threshold.
  • the NR controller 30 may select from among the TPs other than the first TPG. That is, the TPs in the second TPG may all belong to the first TPG, or the TP part in the second TPG belongs to the first TPG, and the other part does not belong to the first TPG, or the TPs in the second TPG do not belong to the first TPG.
  • the switching threshold may be pre-configured on the NR controller 30.
  • the handover threshold may be received by the NR controller 30 from the base station eNB 20 of the LTE, for example, the measurement request in S106 includes the handover threshold.
  • the NR controller 30 may determine whether the signal strength information carried by the first measurement report of the TP in the first TPG within the preset time period satisfies a handover threshold; if within a preset duration, The signal strength information carried by all the first measurement reports of the TP in the first TPG satisfies the handover threshold, and the NR controller 30 allocates the second TPG to the UE 10.
  • the switching threshold is greater than the measurement threshold described above.
  • the NR controller 30 can select at least one TP as the second TPG from the first TPG according to the preset duration and the handover threshold.
  • the preset duration can be implemented by using a timer.
  • the NR controller 30 can determine whether the signal strength information meets the switching threshold during the running time of the timer.
  • the NR controller 30 may also select from other TPs other than the first TPG as part of the TP in the second TPG. That is to say, all or part of the TPs in the second TPG belong to the first TPG, or all of the TPs in the second TPG do not belong to the first TPG.
  • the preset duration may be pre-configured on the NR controller 30. Alternatively, the preset duration may be received by the NR controller 30 from the base station eNB 20 of the LTE. For example, the measurement request in S106 includes the preset duration.
  • the eNB 20 can configure the timer for the NR controller 30 before S118.
  • the measurement request includes indication information of a timer, where the indication information includes a duration of the timer (ie, a preset duration).
  • the NR controller 30 sends a handover indication message to the eNB 20.
  • the handover indication message may include indication information of the second TPG to enable data transmission between the UE 10 and the TP in the second TPG.
  • the handover indication message may further include: transmission resource information configured by the NR controller 30 for the UE 10, and/or a new ID allocated by the NR controller 30 to the UE 10.
  • the handover indication message may further include a configuration of layer one (L1) and/or layer two (L2) and/or layer three (L3), etc., which is not limited in this application.
  • the eNB 20 can determine whether to permit the UE 10 to perform handover according to the handover indication message. That is, the eNB 20 decides whether or not to use the NR as the serving cell of the UE 10.
  • the eNB 20 may directly agree to use the NR as the service of the UE 10. Community.
  • the eNB 20 may perform a certain determination and then decide whether to agree to use the NR as the serving cell of the UE 10. For example, if the signal quality between the eNB 20 and the UE 10 is greater than or equal to a certain quality threshold, and the current load of the eNB 20 is less than a certain load threshold, the eNB 20 may decide to reject the NR as the serving cell of the UE 10.
  • the eNB 20 may decide to use the NR as the serving cell of the UE 10.
  • the eNB 20 sends a handover command to the UE 10.
  • the eNB 20 may perform S122 if it decides to use the NR as the serving cell of the UE 10.
  • the handover command may include indication information of the second TPG allocated by the NR controller 30 for the UE 10.
  • the UE 10 performs data transmission with the TP in the second TPG.
  • the UE 10 may use the hyper cell as the serving cell or the hyper cell as one of the serving cells according to the handover command, and communicate with the TP in the second TPG.
  • the handover indication message in S120 includes: the transmission resource information configured by the NR controller 30 for the UE 10, and correspondingly, the handover command in the S122 also includes the transmission resource information, then in S124, the UE 10 according to the transmission resource information, Data transmission with the TP in the second TPG.
  • the handover indication message in S120 includes: a new ID (such as new DCID) allocated by the NR controller 30 to the UE 10, correspondingly, the handover command in S122 also includes the new ID, then in S124, the UE 10 uses The new ID is transmitted with the TP in the second TPG.
  • a new ID such as new DCID
  • the UE 10 reuses the previous NR configuration and performs data transmission with the TP in the second TPG.
  • the UE 10 may send an SRS to the TP in the second TPG according to the NR configuration, and establish a data transmission with the TP in the second TPG.
  • the embodiment of the present application can implement switching between the network-centric LTE system and the user-centered NR system, ensuring continuity of services, improving handover efficiency, and thus ensuring transmission quality.
  • uplink synchronization of the UE 10 and the NR controller 30 may be completed before the UE 10 transmits the uplink reference signal in S114.
  • the method may include:
  • the eNB 20 determines the TA between the UE 10 and the NR controller 30.
  • the eNB 20 may determine the third TA between the UE 10 and the NR controller 30 according to the first TA value between the eNB 20 and the UE 10 and the second TA value between the eNB 20 and the NR controller 30. value.
  • the eNB 20 may then transmit the determined third TA value to the UE 10.
  • the first RRC configuration message in S112 includes a DCID, a time-frequency resource configuration of an uplink reference signal, and a third TA.
  • the method further includes: the eNB 20 sends a second RRC configuration message to the UE 10.
  • the first RRC configuration message includes a DCID
  • the second RRC configuration message includes a time-frequency resource configuration of the uplink reference signal and a third TA.
  • the first RRC configuration message includes a DCID and a time-frequency resource configuration of the uplink reference signal
  • the second RRC configuration message includes a third TA.
  • S112 may be performed before or after S111, which is not limited in this application.
  • the method further includes: the eNB 20 sends a second RRC configuration message to the UE 10.
  • the first An RRC configuration message includes a DCID and a third TA
  • the second RRC configuration message includes a time-frequency resource configuration of the uplink reference signal.
  • the sending of the second RRC configuration message may be performed before or after S111, which is not limited in this application.
  • the TA value between the UE 10 and the NR controller 30 is quickly determined by the eNB 20, and the efficiency of handover can be ensured.
  • the method may include:
  • the measurement response in S108 may further include a TA test command to facilitate the eNB 20 to instruct the UE 10 to transmit a TA test message. That is, the measurement response in S108 includes a DCID and a TA test command. Alternatively, the measurement response in S108 includes a DCID, a time-frequency resource configuration of the uplink reference signal, and a TA test command.
  • the first RRC configuration message in S112 may further include the TA test instruction. That is, the first RRC configuration message in S112 may include a DCID and a TA test instruction. Alternatively, the first RRC configuration message in S112 may include a DCID, a time-frequency resource configuration of the uplink reference signal, and a TA test instruction.
  • the TA test command may include a random access preamble sequence preamble index configured for the UE, a time-frequency resource information (such as a PRACH Mask Index) for transmitting a preamble index, and the like.
  • the UE 10 sends a TA test message.
  • the UE 10 may send the TA test message to the NR controller 30 according to the TA test command.
  • the TA test message may also be referred to as an uplink TA estimation signal or an uplink TA test signal, etc., which is not limited in this application.
  • the S1131 may further include: the UE 10 may randomly select a random access preamble sequence preamble index and a random access time-frequency resource according to the random access resource configuration broadcast by the NR controller, and send the TA test message to the NR controller 30.
  • the NR controller 30 transmits the TA value to the eNB 20.
  • the NR controller 30 can calculate the TA value based on the received TA test message.
  • the NR controller 30 may send a measurement configuration response message to the eNB 20, where the measurement configuration response message carries the TA value.
  • the eNB 20 transmits the TA value to the UE 10.
  • the eNB 20 may send a second RRC configuration message to the UE 10, where the second RRC configuration message carries the TA value.
  • the NR controller 30 may send the TA value directly to the UE 10. That is, S1132 and S1133 may be replaced with the following steps: The NR controller 30 transmits the TA value to the UE 10.
  • the NR controller 30 may first configure a dedicated preamble for the UE 10 to obtain a TA, as shown in FIG. 6, including:
  • the NR controller 30 transmits a dedicated preamble configuration to the UE 10.
  • the NR controller 30 may configure the UE 10 with a random access preamble sequence preamble index and transmit time-frequency resource information of the preamble index.
  • the UE 10 transmits a TA test message to the NR controller 30.
  • the TA test message may also be referred to as an uplink TA estimation signal or an uplink TA test signal, etc., this application This is not limited.
  • the UE 20 can directly access the NR controller 30 according to the dedicated preamble configuration without starting the NAS and S1-like interface establishment process, and does not perform data transmission, so that the handover efficiency can be improved.
  • the measurement response in S108 includes a DCID, a time-frequency resource configuration of the uplink reference signal, and a TA value.
  • the NR controller 30 can first configure the UE 10 with a dedicated preamble to obtain the TA value, and then configure the DCID and the time-frequency resources of the uplink reference signal.
  • the first RRC configuration message in S112 also includes a DCID, a time-frequency resource configuration of the uplink reference signal, and a TA value.
  • the TA value between the UE 10 and the NR controller 30 is determined by the NR controller 30 based on the TA test message transmitted by the UE 10, and the accuracy of the TA value can be ensured. Thereby ensuring the quality of the handover.
  • the handover decision of the UE 10 to perform handover may also be performed by the eNB 20, as shown in FIG.
  • Some or all of the steps S102 to S116 may be performed before S1171 shown in FIG. 7, and steps S102 to S116 may be referred to any of the foregoing embodiments shown in FIG. 3 to FIG. 6. To avoid repetition, details are not described herein again.
  • the NR controller 30 transmits measurement indication information to the eNB 20.
  • the NR controller 30 may determine whether the signal strength information carried by the first measurement report of the TP in the first TPG meets a handover threshold; if the signal strength information carried by the first measurement report of the TP in the first TPG is satisfied When the threshold is switched, the NR controller 30 executes S1171.
  • the switching threshold may be pre-configured on the NR controller 30.
  • the handover threshold may be received by the NR controller 30 from the base station eNB 20 of the LTE, for example, the measurement request in S106 includes the handover threshold.
  • the NR controller 30 may determine whether the signal strength information carried by the first measurement report of the TP in the first TPG in the preset time period satisfies a handover threshold; if within a preset duration, in the first TPG The signal strength information carried by the first measurement report of the TP satisfies the switching threshold, and the NR controller 30 executes S1171.
  • the switching threshold and the preset duration may be pre-configured on the NR controller 30.
  • the handover threshold and the preset duration may be received by the NR controller 30 from the base station eNB 20 of the LTE.
  • the measurement request in S106 includes the handover threshold and the preset duration.
  • the measurement indication information may include a first measurement report of the TP in the first TPG.
  • the measurement indication information may include indication information that satisfies the handover quality requirement, such as TURE or 1.
  • the eNB 20 performs a handover decision.
  • the eNB 20 decides whether or not to use the NR as one serving cell of the UE 10.
  • the eNB 20 may directly agree to use the NR as the serving cell of the UE 10.
  • the eNB 20 may perform a certain determination before deciding whether to agree to use the NR as the serving cell of the UE 10. For example, if the signal quality between the eNB 20 and the UE 10 is greater than or equal to a certain quality threshold, and the current load of the eNB 20 is less than a certain load threshold, the eNB 20 may decide to reject the NR as the serving cell of the UE 10.
  • the eNB 20 may decide to use the NR as the serving cell of the UE 10.
  • S1173 may be performed.
  • the eNB 20 transmits a handover request to the NR controller 30.
  • the NR controller 30 allocates a second TPG to the UE 10.
  • the NR controller 30 may, after receiving the handover request, use all or part of the TP in the first TPG that meets the handover threshold as the second TPG.
  • the NR controller 30 may also configure the UE 10 with a new ID (eg, new DCID) and/or transmission resources, and the like.
  • a new ID eg, new DCID
  • the NR controller 30 transmits a handover response to the eNB 20.
  • the handover response may include indication information of the second TPG.
  • the handover response may further include transmission resource information configured by the NR controller 30 for the UE 10, and/or a new ID assigned by the NR controller 30 to the UE 10.
  • the switching response may further include the configuration of layer one (L1) and/or layer two (L2) and/or layer three (L3), etc., which is not limited in this application.
  • S122 and S124 can refer to the related description in the foregoing embodiment of FIG. 3. To avoid repetition, details are not described herein again.
  • the UE performs the heterogeneous system detection, and the handover from the LTE system to the NR system can be completed based on the detection, and the continuous mobility between the LTE system and the NR system can be ensured, and the handover efficiency is ensured.
  • FIG. 8 is a schematic flowchart of a handover of a UE from NR to LTE according to an embodiment of the present application. It should be understood that FIG. 8 illustrates detailed communication steps or operations applied to switch from NR to LTE, but these steps or operations are merely examples, and other embodiments of the present application may perform other operations or various operations in FIG. Deformation. Moreover, the various steps in FIG. 8 may be performed in a different order than that presented in FIG. 8, and it is possible that not all operations in FIG. 8 are to be performed.
  • the UE 10, the NR controller 30, and the eNB 20 are shown in FIG.
  • the method shown in Figure 8 can include:
  • the NR controller 30 sends a measurement configuration to the UE 10.
  • the UE 10 is initially in the service range of the hyper cell.
  • the uplink reference signal is periodically or uninterrupted, so that the NR controller 30 can determine the location of the UE 10 according to the first measurement report of the uplink reference signal detected by the TP.
  • the NR controller 30 receives the first measurement report sent by each TP in the at least one TP, and the at least one TP is located at the edge of the hyper cell, and the NR controller 30 may determine that the UE 10 is also in the hyper cell. edge. Further, the NR controller 30 can execute S202.
  • the measurement configuration in S202 is used to instruct the UE 10 to perform downlink measurement.
  • the measurement configuration in S202 is used to indicate that the UE 10 periodically performs downlink measurement, where the measurement configuration may carry the cycle.
  • the eNB 20 transmits a downlink reference signal.
  • a base station i.e., eNB 20 in LTE periodically transmits a downlink reference signal.
  • eNB 20 a base station
  • the eNB 20 sends the downlink reference signal as an example, but the embodiment of the present application is not limited thereto. For example, it can be a downlink synchronization signal.
  • the UE 10 performs downlink measurement.
  • the UE 10 may perform downlink measurement according to the measurement configuration in S202, thereby detecting the downlink reference signal transmitted by the eNB 20.
  • the UE 10 may determine its signal quality according to the detected downlink reference signal, and may acquire the ID of the eNB 20.
  • the UE 10 sends a third measurement report to the NR controller 30.
  • the third measurement report may include a signal quality of the downlink reference signal and/or an ID of the LTE cell.
  • the third measurement report may further include an ID of the UE 10.
  • the NR controller 30 sends a handover request to the eNB 20.
  • the third measurement report includes a signal quality of the downlink reference signal, and if the signal quality is greater than or equal to the handover threshold, the NR controller 30 transmits a handover request to the eNB 20.
  • the handover request may include the ID of the UE 10.
  • the eNB 20 sends a handover response to the NR controller 30.
  • the NR controller 30 sends a handover command to the UE 10.
  • the UE 10 can perform a random access procedure with the eNB 20 after receiving the handover command, and thereafter execute S216.
  • the UE 10 performs data transmission with the eNB 20.
  • the handover from the NR system to the LTE system can be completed in the manner as shown in FIG. 8, and the method can ensure continuous movement of the UE between the NR system and the LTE system. Sexuality guarantees the efficiency of switching.
  • the method may include:
  • the NR controller 30 transmits measurement indication information to the eNB 20.
  • the measurement indication information may include a signal quality of the downlink reference signal and/or an ID of the eNB.
  • the measurement indication information may further include an ID of the UE 10.
  • the eNB can determine whether the signal quality of the downlink reference signal satisfies the handover threshold, and if so, execute S211.
  • the eNB 20 transmits the handover indication information to the NR controller 30.
  • the eNB 20 transmits handover indication information to the NR controller 30.
  • the eNB 20 can determine that the UE 10 is already within the service range of the eNB 20, then allow the UE 10 to perform handover, that is, allow the UE 10 to use the eNB 20 As a service cell.
  • the handover from the NR system to the LTE system can be completed in the manner as shown in FIG. 9, and the method can ensure the continuity between the UE and the LTE system. Mobility ensures the efficiency of switching.
  • FIG. 10 is a schematic flowchart of a method for cell reselection according to an embodiment of the present application. include:
  • the UE 10 receives the indication information of the TP 40.
  • the UE 10 may be in a mobile state in the hyper cell.
  • the TP of the outermost cell of the hyper cell (such as TP3) may send indication information to the UE 10. That is, the TP 40 in FIG. 10 is the TP of the outermost layer of the hyper cell, for example, TP3.
  • the indication information may be carried in a system message, or may be carried in a PSS or SSS or other downlink. In the common channel, this application is not limited thereto.
  • the indication information may be sent by the TP 40 in the form of a broadcast.
  • the indication information may also be sent by the NR controller to the UE 10 by using dedicated signaling.
  • the NR controller 30 can configure the outermost TP of the hyper cell, so that the outermost TP sends the indication information to the UE 10 after detecting the uplink reference signal of the UE 10.
  • the TP 40 (that is, the TP of the outermost cell of the hyper cell, for example, TP3) detects the uplink reference signal of the UE 10, and the signal strength of the uplink reference signal is lower than a certain threshold, the TP 40 may determine the UE. 10 has reached the edge of the hyper cell, and the TP 40 can send indication information to the UE 10.
  • the UE 10 performs downlink measurement according to the indication information.
  • the UE in the hyper cell may be in a power-saving state or an active state. That is, the UE has two states, and can switch between the two states. For example, when there is no service data transmission for a period of time after the UE data transmission is completed, the UE can be switched from the active state to the power-saving state; in the power-saving state, The UE may not monitor the dynamic control channel, and only needs to support a small amount of connection management, which consumes less power than the active state. For example, the power-saving UE may continue to reserve the dedicated user equipment identity, continue to send the uplink reference signal, and listen to the paging message.
  • the power-saving UE may also be referred to as an idle state UE or a UE called an ECO state, and ECO means Ecology, Conservation, and Optimization.
  • the activated state UE may also be referred to as a connected state UE.
  • the active state UE may enter the DRX.
  • the UE 10 may perform downlink measurement when the trigger condition is met.
  • the triggering condition may be: (1) receiving the indication information of the TP, (2) the UE has reached the edge of the hyper cell, (3), the UE is in a power-saving state, or is in an active state without service transmission, or At least one of the active states of DRX.
  • the UE 10 may perform downlink measurements.
  • the UE 10 performs the downlink measurement, that is, the UE 10 measures the downlink reference signal of each neighboring cell 50 according to the configuration of the NR controller or the configuration broadcast by the NR controller, and the neighboring cell 50 may be a cell of the eNB, or adjacent.
  • the UE 10 detects the downlink reference signal transmitted by the neighboring cell 50 at S203.
  • the UE 10 reselects to the neighboring cell.
  • the UE 10 if the UE 10 detects that the signal quality of the currently located hyper cell is lower than the first threshold, and/or, if the UE 10 detects that the signal quality of the downlink reference signal of the neighboring cell is higher than the second threshold, the UE 10 Perform cell reselection.
  • the second threshold is greater than the first threshold.
  • the UE 10 performs downlink measurement at S205 and performs cell reselection based on the measurement result.
  • the UE 10 may select a cell that resides in a signal condition as much as possible.
  • the UE in the hyper cell in the power-saving state or the no-service active state or the active state of the DRX can perform downlink measurement, thereby completing cell reselection.
  • FIG. 11 is a schematic flowchart of cell handover in the embodiment of the present application. The method shown in Figure 11 includes:
  • the first network device sends a dedicated connection identifier DCID to the second network device of the current serving cell of the user equipment UE, so that the second network device forwards the DCID to the UE, where the DCID is used by the The first network device identifies the UE.
  • the first network device sends a time-frequency resource configuration of the uplink reference signal to the second network device, so that the second network device forwards the time-frequency resource configuration of the uplink reference signal to the UE.
  • the first network device sends a handover indication message to the second network device, where the handover indication message is sent.
  • An identifier of a second node in the first network in which the first network device is located is included to cause the UE to perform data transmission with the node.
  • the first network device in the embodiment of the present application is a network device in a user-centric system
  • the second network device is a network device in a network-centric system
  • the first network device is the NR controller in the foregoing embodiment
  • the second network device is the eNB in the foregoing embodiment
  • the first network where the first network device is located may be the NR. This application is not limited thereto.
  • the method may further include:
  • the first network device Sending, by the first network device, a measurement indication message to the first node, instructing the first node to measure an uplink reference signal sent by the UE, where the measurement indication message carries the DCID and a time frequency of the uplink reference signal Resource allocation
  • the first network device allocates a second node to the UE according to the first measurement report of the first node.
  • the node in S303 includes the second node, that is, the handover indication message includes an identifier of the second node, so that the UE performs data transmission with the second node.
  • the measurement indication message may further include a measurement threshold, so that the first node performs reporting based on the measurement threshold. Specifically, the first node sends the first measurement report to the first network device, if the first node detects that the signal strength of the uplink reference signal is greater than or equal to the measurement threshold.
  • the node may be a TP.
  • the first node is a TP in a first Transmission Point Group (TPG)
  • the second node is a TP in a second TPG.
  • the first network device receives the first measurement report of the TP in the first TPG, and allocates the second TPG to the UE according to the first measurement report of the TP in the first TPG.
  • the first measurement report here may be sent by the TP in the first TPG separately.
  • the node may be a DU and a TP
  • the first network device receives the first measurement report of the TP in the first TPG sent by the DU, and according to the TP in the first TPG.
  • a measurement report assigns a second TPG to the UE. That is, the TP in the first TPG separately transmits the first measurement report to the DU, and the first network device receives the first measurement report of the TP in the first TPG from the DU.
  • the TPs of the first TPG may belong to the same or different DUs
  • the TPs of the second TPG may belong to the same or different DUs.
  • the first TPG may include one or more TPs; the second TPG may include the first or multiple TPs.
  • the first network device may include: the first network device determining the first Whether the measurement result carried by the first measurement report of the node meets the handover threshold; if the measurement result carried by the first measurement report of the first node meets the handover threshold, the first network device is the The UE allocates the second node.
  • the switching threshold may be pre-stored or pre-configured in the first network device, or may be acquired by the first network device from the second network device. For example, prior to this, the first network device may receive the handover threshold from the second network device.
  • the first network device by using the first measurement report of the first node, to allocate the second node to the UE, may include: determining, by the first network device, that the preset time is Whether the measurement result carried by the first measurement report of the first node meets a handover threshold; if the measurement result carried by the first measurement report of the first node meets the handover threshold, the a network device assigning the second to the UE node.
  • the preset duration and the handover threshold may be pre-stored or pre-configured in the first network device, or may be acquired by the first network device from the second network device. For example, before this, the first network device may receive the preset duration and the switching threshold from the second network device.
  • S301 and S302 can be simultaneously executed.
  • the first network device receives the measurement request sent by the second network device.
  • S301 and S302 may include: the first network device sends a measurement response to the second network device, and the measurement response includes a DCID and a time-frequency resource configuration of the uplink reference signal. That is, the DCID and the time-frequency resource configuration of the uplink reference signal include a measurement response corresponding to the measurement request.
  • the related description refer to the detailed description of S106 and S108 in the foregoing embodiment. To avoid repetition, details are not described herein again.
  • the second network device may determine the TA value between the first network device and the UE, and correspondingly, the first network device may receive the TA value sent by the second network device.
  • the first network device may determine the TA value between the UE and the UE, and correspondingly, the first network device sends the TA test command to the second network device, so that The second network device instructs the UE to send a TA test message; the first network device receives the TA test message sent by the UE; the first network device determines the TA value according to the TA test message; the first network device sends the TA value to UE.
  • the first network device may send the TA value to the UE.
  • the first network device may send the TA value to the second network device, and the second network device forwards the TA value to the UE.
  • the S303 may refer to the related description of the S120 in the foregoing embodiment.
  • the handover indication message may further include: the transmission resource information configured by the first network device for the UE, and/or the A new ID or the like assigned by the first network device to the UE. To avoid repetition, we will not repeat them here.
  • the first network device in the embodiment of the present application can send the time-frequency resource configuration of the DCID and the uplink reference signal to the second network device, so that the second network device can be used to instruct the UE to send the uplink reference signal. Further, the first network device may instruct the UE to use the first network device as a serving cell by using the handover indication message, and perform data communication with the node on the first network side, so as to complete the handover of the second network device to the first network device. To ensure the continuity of the UE's business.
  • FIG. 12 is another schematic flowchart of cell handover in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the method shown in Figure 13 includes:
  • the UE receives a first RRC configuration message sent by a second network device of the current serving cell, where the first RRC configuration message includes a DCID, where the DCID is used by the first network device to identify the UE.
  • the UE receives a second RRC configuration message sent by the second network device, where the second RRC configuration message includes a time-frequency resource configuration of an uplink reference signal.
  • the UE sends an uplink reference signal according to the first RRC configuration message and the second RRC configuration message.
  • the UE receives a handover command sent by the second network device, where the handover command includes an identifier of a second node that is allocated by the first network device to the UE.
  • the UE performs data transmission with the second node according to the handover command.
  • the first network device in the embodiment of the present application is a network device in a user-centric system
  • the second network device is a network device in a network-centric system
  • the first network device is the NR controller in the foregoing embodiment
  • the second network device is the eNB in the foregoing embodiment, and correspondingly, the first network where the first network device is located
  • the network can be NR. This application is not limited thereto.
  • S401 and S402 can be performed at the same time, where the first RRC configuration message and the second RRC configuration message can be the same message, for example, the first RRC configuration message, and the first RRC configuration message includes the DCID and the uplink. Time-frequency resource configuration of the reference signal.
  • the method may include: performing, by the UE in the service scope of the second network device, heterogeneous system detection; the UE generating a second measurement report according to the result of the heterogeneous system detection, The second measurement report includes a cell ID of the first network side where the first network device is located; and the UE sends the second measurement report to the second network device.
  • the UE may perform the heterogeneous system detection when the trigger condition is met; or the UE may periodically perform the heterogeneous system detection.
  • the triggering condition may be that the signal quality of the second network device detected by the UE is lower than a preset threshold.
  • the UE may receive the measurement control message sent by the second network device, and perform the different system measurement according to the measurement control message.
  • the measurement control message may include the foregoing preset threshold, so that the UE may perform the heterogeneous system detection based on the trigger condition.
  • the measurement control message may include a size of a period such that the UE may perform heterogeneous system detection based on the period.
  • the performing the inter-system detection by the UE may include: performing, by the UE, the inter-system detection, and detecting the primary synchronization signal PSS, the secondary synchronization signal SSS, and the downlink reference signal of the first network sent by the first node in the first network. At least one of the system information SI.
  • the first node in the embodiment of the present application may include a TP in the first TPG
  • the second node may include a TP in the second TPG
  • the method may further include: the UE completing uplink synchronization with the first network device.
  • the UE receives the TA value sent by the second network device.
  • the TA value is determined by the second network device according to a first TA value between the second network device and the UE and a second TA value between the second network device and the first network device.
  • the UE before S403, the UE receives a TA test command sent by the second network device; according to the TA test command, the UE sends a TATA test message to the first network device; and, the UE receives the first The TA value sent by the network device.
  • the UE may receive the TA value directly from the first network device.
  • the UE may receive the TA value determined by the first network device from the second network device. That is, the first network device may send the TA value to the second network device, and the second network device forwards the TA value to the UE.
  • the TA value may be carried in the second RRC configuration message. That is, the second RRC configuration message may include a time-frequency resource configuration and a TA value of the uplink reference signal. It can be understood that if the second RRC configuration message is the same message as the first RRC configuration message, the first RRC configuration message may include a DCID, a time-frequency resource configuration of the uplink reference signal, and a TA value.
  • the UE may send an uplink reference signal to a node in the first network device by using a time-frequency resource configuration of the uplink reference signal based on the DCID.
  • the TP in the first TPG in the first network side where the first network device is located can detect the uplink reference signal and send the first measurement report to the first network device.
  • the handover command in S404 may include an identifier of the second node.
  • the UE According to the switching command, data transmission is performed with the second node.
  • the handover command in S404 may include indication information of the second TPG.
  • the UE may perform data transmission with the TP in the second TPG according to the handover command.
  • the UE may use the first network where the first network device is located as one serving cell of the UE according to the handover command; or, the UE may switch the serving cell to the first network device according to the handover instruction.
  • the first network may be used to switch the serving cell to the first network device according to the handover instruction.
  • the UE in the embodiment of the present application can send the uplink reference information according to the time-frequency resource configuration of the second network device to send the DCID and the uplink reference signal, and further complete the handover of the second network device to the first network device based on the handover command, and ensure The continuity of the business.
  • FIG. 13 is another schematic flowchart of cell handover in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the method shown in Figure 13 includes:
  • the second network device receives a time-frequency resource configuration of a DCID and an uplink reference signal sent by the first network device, where the DCID is used by the first network device to identify the UE.
  • the second network device sends a first RRC configuration message to the UE, where the first RRC configuration message includes the DCID.
  • the second network device sends a second RRC configuration message to the UE, where the second RRC configuration message includes a time-frequency resource configuration of the uplink reference signal, so that the UE is configured according to the first RRC configuration message and the The second RRC configuration message sends an uplink reference signal.
  • the first network device in the embodiment of the present application is a network device in a user-centric system
  • the second network device is a network device in a network-centric system
  • the first network device is the NR controller in the foregoing embodiment
  • the second network device is the eNB in the foregoing embodiment
  • the first network where the first network device is located may be the NR. This application is not limited thereto.
  • the second network device may receive a second measurement report sent by the UE, where the second measurement report includes a cell ID of the first network where the first network device is located.
  • the cell ID here may be determined by the UE performing an inter-system measurement.
  • the second network device may send a measurement request to the first network device, and receive a measurement response of the first network device, where the measurement response may include a DCID and a time-frequency resource configuration of the uplink reference signal.
  • the second network device may send a measurement control message to the UE, so that the UE performs the inter-system measurement based on the measurement control message.
  • the measurement request may include a switching threshold and/or a preset duration.
  • the second network device can receive the time-frequency resource configuration of the DCID and the uplink reference signal by measuring the response.
  • S502 and S503 may be performed at the same time, where the first RRC configuration message and the second RRC configuration message may be the same message, for example, a first RRC configuration message, where the first RRC configuration message includes a DCID and an uplink.
  • Time-frequency resource configuration of the reference signal That is, the second network device may send a first RRC configuration message to the UE, where the first RRC configuration message includes a time-frequency resource configuration of the DCID and the uplink reference signal, so that the UE according to the DCID and the time-frequency resource of the uplink reference signal Configure to send uplink reference signals.
  • the method may further include: the second network device according to the first TA value between the second network device and the UE, and the second network device and the first network device a second TA value, determining a TA value between the UE and the first network device; and the second network device transmitting the determined TA value to the UE.
  • the method may further include: the second network device receiving the TA value sent by the first network device; and the second network device sending the TA value to the UE.
  • the method may further include: the second network device receives the TA test command sent by the first network device, and the second network device forwards the TA test command to the UE, so that the UE sends the UE to the first network device. Send a TA test message. Further, the second network device may receive the TA value determined by the first network device based on the TA test message, and send the TA value to the UE.
  • the TA value may be carried in the second RRC configuration message, that is, the second RRC configuration message may include a time-frequency resource configuration and a TA value of the uplink reference signal. It can be understood that if the second RRC configuration message is the same message as the first RRC configuration message, the first RRC configuration message may include a DCID, a time-frequency resource configuration of the uplink reference signal, and a TA value.
  • the second network device may receive the handover indication information sent by the first network device, where the handover indication information includes an identifier of the second node in the first network where the first network device is located; and the second network device is configured according to the handover The indication information is sent to the UE, where the handover command includes an identifier of the second node, where the handover command is used to indicate that the UE performs data transmission with the second node.
  • the second node may be a TP in the second TPG.
  • the handover indication message may further include: the transmission resource information configured by the first network device for the UE, and/or the new ID allocated by the first network device to the UE.
  • the handover command may further include: the transmission resource information configured by the first network device for the UE, and/or the new ID allocated by the first network device to the UE.
  • the UE that is in the service range of the second network device can be assisted by the second network device to complete the handover of the second network device to the first network device, and can include the continuity of the service of the UE.
  • FIG. 14 is a structural block diagram of a network device according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the network device 100 shown in FIG. 14 may be the first network device 100, including the transmitting unit 120, the receiving unit 140, and the processing unit 160.
  • the sending unit 120 is configured to: send, to the second network device that is currently serving the cell of the user equipment UE, a dedicated connection identifier DCID, so that the second network device forwards the DCID to the UE, where the DCID is used by the UE
  • the first network device identifies the UE; and is further configured to send, to the second network device, a time-frequency resource configuration of the uplink reference signal, so that the second network device forwards the time-frequency resource configuration of the uplink reference signal
  • the UE is further configured to send a handover indication message to the second network device, where the handover indication message includes an identifier of a second node in the first network where the first network device is located, to enable the UE Data transmission with the second node.
  • the first network device in the embodiment of the present application is a network device in a user-centric system
  • the second network device is a network device in a network-centric system
  • the first network device is the NR controller in the foregoing embodiment
  • the second network device is the eNB in the foregoing embodiment
  • the first network where the first network device is located may be the NR. This application is not limited thereto.
  • the handover indication message may further include: transmission resource information configured by the first network device for the UE, and/or a new ID allocated by the first network device to the UE. In this way, the UE can communicate with the second node according to the transmission resource information.
  • the sending unit 120 is further configured to send the measurement indication message to the first node, where the first node is configured to measure an uplink reference signal sent by the UE, where the measurement indication message carries the The DCID and the time-frequency resource configuration of the uplink reference signal.
  • the receiving unit 140 is configured to receive the first sent by the first node And a measurement report, where the first measurement report carries a measurement result of the uplink reference signal sent by the UE.
  • the processing unit 160 is configured to allocate the second node to the UE according to the first measurement report of the first node.
  • the measurement result of the uplink reference signal may be the signal strength information of the uplink reference signal.
  • the first measurement report may carry signal strength information of the uplink reference signal sent by the UE.
  • the processing unit 160 may be specifically configured to: determine whether the measurement result carried by the first measurement report of the first node meets a handover threshold; and if the measurement result carried by the first measurement report of the first node is satisfied, And the switching threshold, the second node is allocated to the UE.
  • the processing unit 160 may be specifically configured to: determine whether the measurement result carried by the first measurement report of the first node within a preset duration satisfies the handover threshold.
  • the preset duration and/or the handover threshold may be preset in the first network device, or may be acquired from the second network device.
  • the sending unit 120 may be further configured to receive the preset duration and/or the switching threshold from the second network device.
  • the receiving unit 140 may be configured to: receive the measurement request sent by the second network device.
  • the time-frequency resource configuration of the DCID and the uplink reference signal is included in a measurement response corresponding to the measurement request. That is, the sending unit 120 may be specifically configured to send a measurement response to the second network device, and the measurement response includes a DCID and a time-frequency resource configuration of the uplink reference signal.
  • the uplink synchronization between the UE and the first network device may also be completed.
  • the receiving unit 140 may be configured to receive a TA value sent by the second network device.
  • the value of the TA may be determined by the second network device, for example, may be the first network value between the second network device and the UE, and the first between the second network device and the first network device. The two TA values are determined.
  • the sending unit 120 may be configured to send a TA test instruction to the second network device, so that the second network device instructs the UE to send a TA test message.
  • the receiving unit 140 may be configured to receive the TA test message sent by the UE.
  • the processing unit 160 may be configured to determine a TA value according to the TA test message.
  • the sending unit 120 is further configured to send the TA value to the UE. That is, the TA value here may be determined by the first network device based on the TA test message.
  • the sending unit 120 sends the TA value to the UE, where the TA value is sent to the second network device, so that the second network device forwards the TA value to the UE.
  • the sending unit 120 may be implemented by a transmitter
  • the receiving unit 140 may be implemented by a receiver
  • the processing unit 160 may be implemented by a processor.
  • the first network device 100 may include The processor 110, the transmitter 130, the receiver 150, and the memory 170.
  • the memory 170 can be used to store code and the like executed by the processor 110.
  • the various components in the first network device 100 are coupled together by a bus system 190, which in addition to the data bus includes a power bus, a control bus, and a status signal bus.
  • a bus system 190 which in addition to the data bus includes a power bus, a control bus, and a status signal bus.
  • the network device 100 shown in FIG. 14 or the network device 100 shown in FIG. 15 can implement the processes performed by the NR controller or the first network device in the foregoing method embodiments of FIG. 1 to FIG. 13, in order to avoid repetition, here is not Let me repeat.
  • FIG. 16 is a structural block diagram of a UE according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the UE 200 shown in FIG. 16 may include a receiving unit 220, a transmitting unit 240, and a processing unit 260.
  • the receiving unit 220 is configured to receive a first RRC configuration message sent by the second network device of the current serving cell, where The first RRC configuration message includes a DCID, where the DCID is used by the first network device to identify the UE, and the receiving unit 220 is further configured to receive a second RRC configuration message sent by the second network device, where the second The RRC configuration message includes a time-frequency resource configuration of the uplink reference signal;
  • the sending unit 240 is configured to send an uplink reference signal according to the first RRC configuration message and the second RRC configuration message;
  • the receiving unit 220 is further configured to receive a handover command sent by the second network device, where the handover command includes an identifier of the second node that is allocated by the first network device to the UE;
  • the processing unit 260 is configured to perform data transmission with the second node according to the switching command.
  • the first network device in the embodiment of the present application is a network device in a user-centric system
  • the second network device is a network device in a network-centric system
  • the first network device is the NR controller in the foregoing embodiment
  • the second network device is the eNB in the foregoing embodiment
  • the first network where the first network device is located may be the NR. This application is not limited thereto.
  • the processing unit 260 is further configured to: perform a different system detection; and generate a second measurement report according to the result of the different system detection, where the second measurement report includes where the first network device is located.
  • the cell ID of the first network is further configured to send the second measurement report to the second network device.
  • the processing unit 260 may be specifically configured to: when the trigger condition is met, perform the heterogeneous system detection; or periodically perform the heterogeneous system detection.
  • the triggering condition may be that the signal quality of the second network device detected by the processing unit 260 is lower than a preset threshold.
  • the receiving unit 220 is further configured to receive a measurement control message sent by the second network device.
  • the processing unit 260 may be specifically configured to perform the different system measurement according to the measurement control message. Subsequently, the processing unit 260 may generate a second measurement report according to the result of the different system detection. And sending, by the sending unit 240, the second measurement report to the second network device.
  • the processing unit 260 performing the heterogeneous system detection may be: performing the heterogeneous system detection, and detecting the primary synchronization signal PSS, the secondary synchronization signal SSS, and the downlink reference of the first network sent by the first node in the first network. At least one of the signal and system information SI.
  • uplink synchronization with the first network device may also be completed.
  • the receiving unit 220 is further configured to receive a TA value sent by the second network device.
  • the TA value may be determined by the second network device, or may be received by the second network device from the first network device.
  • the receiving unit 220 may receive the TA test command sent by the second network device. According to the TA test command, the sending unit 240 sends the TA test message to the first network device. The receiving unit 220 further receives the TA value sent by the first network device.
  • the TA value may be sent by the first network device to the second network device and then sent by the second network device to the UE.
  • the TA value may be included in a second RRC configuration message sent by the second network device. That is, the receiving unit 220 receives the second RRC configuration message sent by the second network device, and the second RRC configuration message may include a time-frequency resource configuration and a TA value of the uplink reference signal.
  • the first RRC configuration message is the same as the second RRC configuration message. Message. It can be seen that the first RRC configuration message may include a time-frequency resource configuration of the DCID and the uplink reference signal; or the first RRC configuration message may include a DCID, a time-frequency resource configuration of the uplink reference signal, and a TA value.
  • the receiving unit 220 may be implemented by a receiver
  • the sending unit 240 may be implemented by a transmitter
  • the processing unit 260 may be implemented by a processor.
  • the UE 200 may include the processor 210.
  • the memory 270 can be used to store code and the like executed by the processor 210.
  • a bus system 290 which in addition to the data bus includes a power bus, a control bus, and a status signal bus.
  • the UE 200 shown in FIG. 16 or the UE 200 shown in FIG. 17 can implement the processes performed by the UE in the foregoing method embodiments of FIG. 1 to FIG. 13 . To avoid repetition, details are not described herein again.
  • FIG. 18 is a structural block diagram of a network device according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the network device 300 shown in FIG. 18 may be the second network device 300, and may include a receiving unit 320, a sending unit 340, and a processing unit 360.
  • the receiving unit 320 is configured to receive a time-frequency resource configuration of a DCID and an uplink reference signal sent by the first network device, where the DCID is used by the first network device to identify the UE.
  • the sending unit 340 is configured to send a first RRC configuration message to the UE, where the first RRC configuration message includes the DCID.
  • the sending unit 340 is further configured to send a second RRC configuration message to the UE, where the second RRC configuration message includes a time-frequency resource configuration of the uplink reference signal, so that the UE is configured according to the first RRC configuration message and the The second RRC configuration message sends an uplink reference signal.
  • the first network device in the embodiment of the present application is a network device in a user-centric system
  • the second network device is a network device in a network-centric system
  • the first network device is the NR controller in the foregoing embodiment
  • the second network device is the eNB in the foregoing embodiment
  • the first network where the first network device is located may be the NR. This application is not limited thereto.
  • the receiving unit 320 is further configured to receive a second measurement report sent by the UE, where the second measurement report includes a cell ID of the first network where the first network device is located.
  • the sending unit 340 is further configured to send a measurement request to the first network device.
  • the receiving unit 320 is further configured to receive a measurement response sent by the first network device, where the measurement response includes a time-frequency resource configuration of the DCID and an uplink reference signal.
  • the sending unit 340 is further configured to send a measurement control message to the UE to instruct the UE to perform an inter-system measurement.
  • the receiving unit 320 is further configured to receive a second measurement report sent by the UE, where the second measurement report includes a cell ID of the first network where the first network device is located.
  • the sending unit 340 is further configured to send a measurement request to the first network device.
  • the receiving unit 320 is further configured to receive a measurement response sent by the first network device, where the measurement response includes a time-frequency resource configuration of the DCID and an uplink reference signal.
  • the measurement request may include a handover threshold, or the measurement request may include a handover threshold and a preset duration.
  • the processing unit 360 may be configured to: according to a first TA value between the second network device and the UE, and between the second network device and the first network device a second TA value determining a third TA value between the UE and the first network device.
  • the sending unit 340 is further configured to send the determined third TA value to the UE. It can be understood that the third TA value here is the TA value between the UE and the first network device.
  • the receiving unit 320 may be configured to receive a TA value sent by the first network device.
  • the sending unit 340 can be configured to send the TA value to the UE.
  • the receiving unit 320 may be configured to receive a TA test instruction sent by the first network device.
  • the sending unit 340 can be configured to send a TA test instruction to the UE to instruct the UE to send a TA test message to the first network device.
  • the receiving unit 320 may be configured to receive a TA value sent by the first network device.
  • the sending unit 340 can be configured to send the TA value to the UE.
  • the TA value may be determined by the first network device based on the TA test message.
  • the TA value sent by the sending unit 340 may be included in the second RRC configuration message. That is, the sending unit 340 may send a second RRC configuration message to the UE, where the second RRC configuration message includes a time-frequency resource configuration and a TA value of the uplink reference signal.
  • the first RRC configuration message and the second RRC configuration message are the same message. It can be seen that the first RRC configuration message may include a time-frequency resource configuration of the DCID and the uplink reference signal; or the first RRC configuration message may include a DCID, a time-frequency resource configuration of the uplink reference signal, and a TA value.
  • the receiving unit 320 is further configured to receive the handover indication information that is sent by the first network device, where the handover indication message includes the first network where the first network device is located.
  • the identity of the second node is further configured to send, according to the handover indication information, a handover command to the UE, where the handover command includes an identifier of the second node, where the handover command is used to indicate the UE and the first Two nodes perform data transmission.
  • the handover indication message may further include: transmission resource information configured by the first network device for the UE, and/or a new ID allocated by the first network device to the UE.
  • the receiving unit 320 may be implemented by a receiver
  • the sending unit 340 may be implemented by a transmitter
  • the processing unit 360 may be implemented by a processor.
  • the network device 300 may include a processor. 310, a transmitter 330, a receiver 350, and a memory 370.
  • the memory 370 can be used to store code and the like executed by the processor 310.
  • the various components in the network device 300 are coupled together by a bus system 390, which in addition to the data bus includes a power bus, a control bus, and a status signal bus.
  • the network device 300 shown in FIG. 18 or the network device 300 shown in FIG. 19 can implement the processes performed by the eNB or the second network device in the foregoing method embodiments of FIG. 1 to FIG. .
  • FIG. 20 is a schematic structural diagram of a system chip according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the system chip 400 of FIG. 20 includes an input interface 410, an output interface 420, at least one processor 430, and a memory 440.
  • the input interface 410, the output interface 420, the processor 430, and the memory 440 are connected by a bus.
  • the processor 430 is configured to execute code in the memory 440, and when the code is executed, the processor 430 implements the method of FIG. 1-10 performed by the NR controller or the first network device.
  • FIG. 21 is a schematic structural diagram of a system chip according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the system chip 500 of FIG. 21 includes an input interface 510, an output interface 520, at least one processor 530, and a memory 540.
  • the input interface 510, the output interface 520, the processor 530, and the memory 540 are connected by a bus.
  • the processor 530 is configured to execute code in the memory 540, and when the code is executed, the processor 530 implements the method performed by the UE in FIGS. 1-10.
  • FIG. 22 is a schematic structural diagram of a system chip according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the system chip 600 of FIG. 22 includes an input interface 610, an output interface 620, at least one processor 630, and a memory 640.
  • the input interface 610, the output interface 620, the processor 630, and the memory 640 are connected by a bus.
  • the processor 630 is configured to execute the The code in memory 640, when the code is executed, the processor 630 implements the method of Figure 1-10 performed by an eNB or a second network device.

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)

Abstract

An embodiment of the present application provides a cell handover method. The method comprises: a first network device sends a DCID and a time-frequency resource allocation of an uplink reference signal to a second network device, so that the second network device sends the DCID and the time-frequency resource allocation of the uplink reference signal to a UE; the UE can send the uplink reference signal according to the DCID and the time-frequency resource allocation of the uplink reference signal; further, the first network device sends a handover indication message to the second network device, the handover indication message comprising an identifier of a second node in a first network where the first network device is located; and the second network device sends a handover command to the UE, so as to instruct the UE transmits data with the second node. By means of the method in the embodiment of the present application, a UE can be handed over between two network systems, and accordingly the service continuity is ensured, the handover efficiency is improved, and the transmission quality can be ensured.

Description

用于小区切换的方法、用户设备及网络设备Method, user equipment and network equipment for cell handover
本申请要求于2016年08月19日提交中国专利局、申请号为201610692263.2、申请名称为“用于小区切换的方法、用户设备及网络设备”的中国专利申请的优先权,其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。The present application claims priority to Chinese Patent Application No. 201610692263.2, filed on Aug. 19, 2016, entitled "Method, User Equipment and Network Equipment for Cell Switching", the entire contents of which are hereby incorporated by reference. Combined in this application.
技术领域Technical field
本申请实施例涉及通信领域,并且更具体地,涉及一种用于小区切换的方法、用户设备及网络设备。The embodiments of the present application relate to the field of communications, and in particular, to a method, a user equipment, and a network device for cell handover.
背景技术Background technique
现有技术中,为了保证用户设备(User Equipment,UE)业务的连续性,需要对UE进行移动性管理。例如,UE从源小区的覆盖范围移动到目标小区的覆盖范围时,需要及时地完成小区之间的切换。In the prior art, in order to ensure the continuity of the service of the user equipment (User Equipment, UE), mobility management of the UE is required. For example, when the UE moves from the coverage of the source cell to the coverage of the target cell, it is necessary to complete the handover between the cells in time.
在现有的通信***中,移动性管理的设计思想均是以网络为中心的设计思想(UE follows network)。以处于激活态的UE为例,为了实现该UE的移动性管理,网络中的各小区会发送下行参考信号,供该UE测量。UE会以测量报告的形式将测量结果上报至网络侧,网络基于该UE的测量报告进行切换判决,将UE切换至信号条件好的小区进行数据传输。In the existing communication system, the design idea of mobility management is a network-oriented design idea (UE follows network). Taking the UE in the active state as an example, in order to implement the mobility management of the UE, each cell in the network sends a downlink reference signal for measurement by the UE. The UE reports the measurement result to the network side in the form of a measurement report. The network performs a handover decision based on the measurement report of the UE, and switches the UE to a cell with a good signal condition for data transmission.
但是,在移动通信***的后续演进过程中,为了满足巨量的数据通信需求,可能会在是热点区域集中部署大量的小小区(small cell),如果继续采用以网络为中心的设计思想,会引起UE的移动性管理难的问题。因此,在后续演进过程中,提出了以用户为中心无线接入(UE Centric No Cell,UCNC)的移动性机制。However, in the subsequent evolution of the mobile communication system, in order to meet the huge data communication requirements, a large number of small cells may be deployed in a hot spot area. If the network-centric design idea continues to be adopted, A problem that causes difficulty in mobility management of the UE. Therefore, in the subsequent evolution process, a mobility mechanism based on UE Centric No Cell (UCNC) is proposed.
当UE在以网络为中心的***与以用户为中心的***之间移动时,如何实现切换成为技术瓶颈。When a UE moves between a network-centric system and a user-centric system, how to implement handover becomes a technical bottleneck.
发明内容Summary of the invention
本申请实施例提供一种用于小区切换的方法、用户设备及网络设备,能够解决UE在以网络为中心的***与以用户为中心的***之间的切换。The embodiments of the present application provide a method, a user equipment, and a network device for cell handover, which can solve handover between a network-centric system and a user-centric system.
第一方面,提供了一种用于小区切换的方法,包括:In a first aspect, a method for cell handover is provided, including:
第一网络设备向用户设备UE当前服务小区的第二网络设备发送专用连接标识DCID,以使得所述第二网络设备将所述DCID转发至所述UE,其中,所述DCID用于所述第一网络设备标识所述UE;Transmitting, by the first network device, a dedicated connection identifier DCID to the second network device of the current serving cell of the user equipment UE, such that the second network device forwards the DCID to the UE, where the DCID is used by the first a network device identifying the UE;
所述第一网络设备向所述第二网络设备发送上行参考信号的时频资源配置,以使得所述第二网络设备将所述上行参考信号的时频资源配置转发至所述UE;The first network device sends a time-frequency resource configuration of the uplink reference signal to the second network device, so that the second network device forwards the time-frequency resource configuration of the uplink reference signal to the UE;
所述第一网络设备向所述第二网络设备发送切换指示消息,所述切换指示消息包括所 述第一网络设备所在的第一网络中的第二节点的标识,以使得所述UE与所述第二节点进行数据传输。Transmitting, by the first network device, a handover indication message to the second network device, where the handover indication message includes An identifier of the second node in the first network where the first network device is located, so that the UE performs data transmission with the second node.
可见,本申请实施例中的第一网络设备可以向第二网络设备发送DCID和上行参考信号的时频资源配置,从而可以通过第二网络设备指示UE发送上行参考信号。进一步地,第一网络设备可以通过切换指示消息指示UE将第一网络设备作为一个服务小区,并与第一网络侧的节点进行数据通信,从而能够完成第二网络设备至第一网络设备的切换,保证UE的业务的连续性。It can be seen that the first network device in the embodiment of the present application can send the time-frequency resource configuration of the DCID and the uplink reference signal to the second network device, so that the second network device can be used to instruct the UE to send the uplink reference signal. Further, the first network device may instruct the UE to use the first network device as a serving cell by using the handover indication message, and perform data communication with the node on the first network side, so as to complete the handover of the second network device to the first network device. To ensure the continuity of the UE's business.
结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些可能的实现方式中,在所述第一网络设备向所述第二网络设备发送切换指示消息之前,还包括:With reference to the first aspect, in some possible implementation manners of the first aspect, before the first network device sends the handover indication message to the second network device, the method further includes:
所述第一网络设备将测量指示消息发送给第一节点,指示所述第一节点测量所述UE发送的上行参考信号,所述测量指示消息携带所述DCID和/或所述上行参考信号的时频资源配置;Sending, by the first network device, a measurement indication message to the first node, instructing the first node to measure an uplink reference signal sent by the UE, where the measurement indication message carries the DCID and/or the uplink reference signal Time-frequency resource configuration;
所述第一网络设备接收所述第一节点发送的第一测量报告,所述第一测量报告携带所述UE发送的所述上行参考信号的测量结果;Receiving, by the first network device, a first measurement report sent by the first node, where the first measurement report carries a measurement result of the uplink reference signal sent by the UE;
所述第一网络设备根据所述第一节点的第一测量报告,为所述UE分配所述第二节点。The first network device allocates the second node to the UE according to the first measurement report of the first node.
结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些可能的实现方式中,所述第一网络设备根据所述第一节点的第一测量报告,为所述UE分配所述第二节点,包括:With reference to the first aspect, in some possible implementation manners of the first aspect, the first network device, according to the first measurement report of the first node, assigning the second node to the UE, including:
所述第一网络设备判断所述第一节点的第一测量报告携带的所述测量结果是否满足切换门限;Determining, by the first network device, whether the measurement result carried by the first measurement report of the first node meets a handover threshold;
如果所述第一节点的第一测量报告携带的所述测量结果满足所述切换门限,则所述第一网络设备为所述UE分配所述第二节点。And if the measurement result carried by the first measurement report of the first node meets the handover threshold, the first network device allocates the second node to the UE.
结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些可能的实现方式中,所述第一网络设备判断所述第一节点的第一测量报告携带的所述测量结果是否满足切换门限,包括:With reference to the first aspect, in some possible implementation manners of the first aspect, the determining, by the first network device, whether the measurement result carried by the first measurement report of the first node meets a handover threshold, includes:
所述第一网络设备判断在预设时长内的所述第一节点的第一测量报告携带的所述测量结果是否满足所述切换门限。The first network device determines whether the measurement result carried by the first measurement report of the first node within a preset duration satisfies the handover threshold.
结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些可能的实现方式中,在所述第一网络设备判断所述第一节点的第一测量报告携带的所述测量结果是否满足切换门限之前,还包括:With reference to the first aspect, in some possible implementation manners of the first aspect, before the determining, by the first network device, that the measurement result carried by the first measurement report of the first node meets a handover threshold, :
所述第一网络设备从所述第二网络设备接收所述预设时长和/或切换门限。The first network device receives the preset duration and/or handover threshold from the second network device.
结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些可能的实现方式中,在所述第一网络设备向UE当前服务小区的第二网络设备发送DCID之前,还包括:With reference to the first aspect, in some possible implementation manners of the first aspect, before the first network device sends the DCID to the second network device of the current serving cell of the UE, the method further includes:
所述第一网络设备接收所述第二网络设备发送的测量请求;Receiving, by the first network device, a measurement request sent by the second network device;
其中,所述DCID和所述上行参考信号的时频资源配置包括在与所述测量请求对应的测量响应中。The time-frequency resource configuration of the DCID and the uplink reference signal is included in a measurement response corresponding to the measurement request.
也就是说,第一网络设备可以向第二网络设备发送测量响应,该测量响应包括DCID和所述上行参考信号的时频资源配置。That is, the first network device may send a measurement response to the second network device, the measurement response including a DCID and a time-frequency resource configuration of the uplink reference signal.
结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些可能的实现方式中,所述切换指示消息还包括:With reference to the first aspect, in some possible implementation manners of the first aspect, the handover indication message further includes:
所述第一网络设备为所述UE配置的传输资源信息,和/或,所述第一网络设备为所述UE分配的新的ID。The first network device is configured to transmit resource information of the UE, and/or the new ID that the first network device allocates to the UE.
结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些可能的实现方式中,在所述第一网络设备向所述第 二网络设备发送切换指示消息之前,还包括:In conjunction with the first aspect, in some possible implementations of the first aspect, the first network device is Before the network device sends the handover indication message, the method further includes:
所述第一网络设备向所述第二网络设备发送TA测试指令,以便于所述第二网络设备指示所述UE发送TA测试消息;Sending, by the first network device, a TA test instruction to the second network device, so that the second network device instructs the UE to send a TA test message;
所述第一网络设备接收所述UE发送的所述TA测试消息;Receiving, by the first network device, the TA test message sent by the UE;
所述第一网络设备根据所述TA测试消息,确定TA值;Determining, by the first network device, a TA value according to the TA test message;
所述第一网络设备将所述TA值发送至所述UE。The first network device sends the TA value to the UE.
结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些可能的实现方式中,所述第一网络设备将所述TA值发送至所述UE,包括:In conjunction with the first aspect, in some possible implementation manners of the first aspect, the sending, by the first network device, the TA value to the UE includes:
所述第一网络设备将所述TA值发送至所述第二网络设备,以使得所述第二网络设备将所述TA值转发至所述UE。The first network device transmits the TA value to the second network device such that the second network device forwards the TA value to the UE.
第二方面,提供了一种用于小区切换的方法,包括:In a second aspect, a method for cell handover is provided, including:
用户设备UE接收当前服务小区的第二网络设备发送的第一无线资源控制RRC配置消息,所述第一RRC配置消息包括专用连接标识DCID,所述DCID用于第一网络设备标识所述UE;The user equipment UE receives the first radio resource control RRC configuration message sent by the second network device of the current serving cell, where the first RRC configuration message includes a dedicated connection identifier DCID, and the DCID is used by the first network device to identify the UE;
所述UE接收所述第二网络设备发送的第二RRC配置消息,所述第二RRC配置消息包括上行参考信号的时频资源配置;Receiving, by the UE, a second RRC configuration message sent by the second network device, where the second RRC configuration message includes a time-frequency resource configuration of an uplink reference signal;
所述UE根据所述第一RRC配置消息和所述第二RRC配置消息发送上行参考信号;Sending, by the UE, an uplink reference signal according to the first RRC configuration message and the second RRC configuration message;
所述UE接收所述第二网络设备发送的切换命令,所述切换命令包括所述第一网络设备为所述UE所分配的第二节点的标识;Receiving, by the UE, a handover command sent by the second network device, where the handover command includes an identifier of a second node that is allocated by the first network device to the UE;
所述UE根据所述切换命令,与所述第二节点进行数据传输。The UE performs data transmission with the second node according to the handover command.
这样,本申请实施例中的UE可以基于第二网络设备发送DCID和上行参考信号的时频资源配置发送上行参考信息,进而可以基于切换命令完成第二网络设备至第一网络设备的切换,保证了业务的连续性。In this way, the UE in the embodiment of the present application can send the uplink reference information according to the time-frequency resource configuration of the second network device to send the DCID and the uplink reference signal, and further complete the handover of the second network device to the first network device based on the handover command, and ensure The continuity of the business.
结合第二方面,在第二方面的某些可能的实现方式中,在所述UE接收当前服务小区的第二网络设备发送的第一RRC配置消息之前,还包括:With reference to the second aspect, in some possible implementation manners of the second aspect, before the receiving, by the UE, the first RRC configuration message sent by the second network device of the current serving cell, the method further includes:
处于所述第二网络设备服务范围内的所述UE执行异***检测;The UE in the service range of the second network device performs heterogeneous system detection;
所述UE根据所述异***检测的结果生成第二测量报告,所述第二测量报告包括第一网络设备所在的第一网络的小区ID;The UE generates a second measurement report according to the result of the detection by the different system, where the second measurement report includes a cell ID of the first network where the first network device is located;
所述UE向所述第二网络设备发送所述第二测量报告。The UE sends the second measurement report to the second network device.
结合第二方面,在第二方面的某些可能的实现方式中,所述UE执行异***检测,包括:With reference to the second aspect, in some possible implementation manners of the second aspect, the performing, by the UE, the performing the system detection includes:
所述UE在满足触发条件时,执行所述异***检测;或者,Performing, by the UE, the heterogeneous system detection when the trigger condition is met; or
所述UE周期性地执行所述异***检测。The UE periodically performs the heterogeneous system detection.
其中,所述触发条件可以为:所述UE检测到的所述第二网络设备的信号质量低于预设的门限。The triggering condition may be that the signal quality of the second network device detected by the UE is lower than a preset threshold.
结合第二方面,在第二方面的某些可能的实现方式中,所述UE执行异***检测,包括:With reference to the second aspect, in some possible implementation manners of the second aspect, the performing, by the UE, the performing the system detection includes:
所述UE接收所述第二网络设备发送的测量控制消息;Receiving, by the UE, a measurement control message sent by the second network device;
所述UE根据所述测量控制消息执行所述异***测量。 The UE performs the heterogeneous system measurement according to the measurement control message.
结合第二方面,在第二方面的某些可能的实现方式中,所述UE执行异***检测,包括:With reference to the second aspect, in some possible implementation manners of the second aspect, the performing, by the UE, the performing the system detection includes:
所述UE执行异***检测,并检测到所述第一网络中的第一节点发送的主同步信号PSS、辅同步信号SSS、所述第一网络的下行参考信号、***信息SI中的至少一项。The UE performs the inter-system detection, and detects at least one of the primary synchronization signal PSS, the secondary synchronization signal SSS, the downlink reference signal of the first network, and the system information SI sent by the first node in the first network. item.
结合第二方面,在第二方面的某些可能的实现方式中,在所述UE根据所述第一RRC配置消息和所述第二RRC配置消息发送上行参考信号之前,还包括:With reference to the second aspect, in some possible implementation manners of the second aspect, before the sending, by the UE, the uplink reference signal according to the first RRC configuration message and the second RRC configuration message, the method further includes:
所述UE向所述第一网络设备发送时间提前量TA测试消息;Sending, by the UE, a timing advance TA test message to the first network device;
所述UE接收所述第一网络设备发送的TA值。The UE receives a TA value sent by the first network device.
可选地,所述TA值包括在所述第二RRC配置消息中。Optionally, the TA value is included in the second RRC configuration message.
结合第二方面,在第二方面的某些可能的实现方式中,在所述UE根据所述第一RRC配置消息和所述第二RRC配置消息发送上行参考信号之前,还包括:With reference to the second aspect, in some possible implementation manners of the second aspect, before the sending, by the UE, the uplink reference signal according to the first RRC configuration message and the second RRC configuration message, the method further includes:
所述UE接收所述第二网络设备发送的TA值。The UE receives a TA value sent by the second network device.
结合第二方面,在第二方面的某些可能的实现方式中,所述第一RRC配置消息与第二RRC配置消息为同一个消息。With reference to the second aspect, in some possible implementation manners of the second aspect, the first RRC configuration message and the second RRC configuration message are the same message.
第三方面,提供了一种用于小区切换的方法,包括:In a third aspect, a method for cell handover is provided, including:
第二网络设备接收第一网络设备发送的专用连接标识DCID和上行参考信号的时频资源配置,其中,所述DCID用于所述第一网络设备标识用户设备UE;The second network device receives the time-frequency resource configuration of the dedicated connection identifier DCID and the uplink reference signal sent by the first network device, where the DCID is used by the first network device to identify the user equipment UE;
所述第二网络设备向所述UE发送第一无线资源控制RRC配置消息,所述第一RRC配置消息包括所述DCID;The second network device sends a first radio resource control RRC configuration message to the UE, where the first RRC configuration message includes the DCID;
所述第二网络设备向所述UE发送第二RRC配置消息,所述第二RRC配置消息包括上行参考信号的时频资源配置,以使得所述UE根据所述第一RRC配置消息和所述第二RRC配置消息发送上行参考信号。The second network device sends a second RRC configuration message to the UE, where the second RRC configuration message includes a time-frequency resource configuration of an uplink reference signal, so that the UE is configured according to the first RRC configuration message and the The second RRC configuration message sends an uplink reference signal.
可见,本申请实施例中,处于第二网络设备服务范围内的UE,可以由第二网络设备协助完成第二网络设备至第一网络设备的切换,并且可以包括UE的业务的连续性。It can be seen that, in the embodiment of the present application, the UE that is in the service range of the second network device can be assisted by the second network device to complete the handover of the second network device to the first network device, and can include the continuity of the service of the UE.
结合第三方面,在第三方面的某些可能的实现方式中,还包括:With reference to the third aspect, in some possible implementation manners of the third aspect, the method further includes:
所述第二网络设备根据所述第二网络设备与所述UE之间的第一时间提前量TA值以及所述第二网络设备与所述第一网络设备之间的第二TA值,确定所述UE与所述第一网络设备之间的第三TA值;Determining, by the second network device, a first time advance TA value between the second network device and the UE, and a second TA value between the second network device and the first network device a third TA value between the UE and the first network device;
所述第二网络设备将所述确定的第三TA值发送至所述UE。The second network device transmits the determined third TA value to the UE.
结合第三方面,在第三方面的某些可能的实现方式中,还包括:With reference to the third aspect, in some possible implementation manners of the third aspect, the method further includes:
所述第二网络设备接收所述第一网络设备发送的TA值;Receiving, by the second network device, a TA value sent by the first network device;
所述第二网络设备将所述TA值发送至所述UE。The second network device sends the TA value to the UE.
可选地,所述TA值包括在所述第二RRC配置消息中。Optionally, the TA value is included in the second RRC configuration message.
结合第三方面,在第三方面的某些可能的实现方式中,所述第一RRC配置消息与所述第二RRC配置消息为同一个消息。With reference to the third aspect, in some possible implementation manners of the third aspect, the first RRC configuration message and the second RRC configuration message are the same message.
结合第三方面,在第三方面的某些可能的实现方式中,在所述第二网络设备接收所述第一网络设备发送的所述TA值之前,还包括:With reference to the third aspect, in some possible implementation manners of the third aspect, before the receiving, by the second network device, the TA value sent by the first network device, the method further includes:
所述第二网络设备向所述UE发送时间提前量TA测试指令,以指示所述UE向所述第一网络设备发送TA测试消息。 The second network device sends a timing advance TA test command to the UE to instruct the UE to send a TA test message to the first network device.
结合第三方面,在第三方面的某些可能的实现方式中,所述第二网络设备接收第一网络设备发送的DCID和上行参考信号的时频资源配置,包括:With reference to the third aspect, in some possible implementation manners of the third aspect, the second network device receives the time-frequency resource configuration of the DCID and the uplink reference signal sent by the first network device, including:
所述第二网络设备接收所述UE发送的第二测量报告,所述第二测量报告包括第一网络设备所在的第一网络的小区ID;Receiving, by the second network device, a second measurement report sent by the UE, where the second measurement report includes a cell ID of a first network where the first network device is located;
所述第二网络设备向所述第一网络设备发送测量请求;Sending, by the second network device, a measurement request to the first network device;
所述第二网络设备接收所述第一网络设备发送的测量响应,所述测量响应包括所述DCID和上行参考信号的时频资源配置。The second network device receives a measurement response sent by the first network device, where the measurement response includes a time-frequency resource configuration of the DCID and an uplink reference signal.
结合第三方面,在第三方面的某些可能的实现方式中,所述测量请求包括切换门限,或者,所述测量请求包括切换门限和预设时长。In conjunction with the third aspect, in some possible implementation manners of the third aspect, the measurement request includes a handover threshold, or the measurement request includes a handover threshold and a preset duration.
结合第三方面,在第三方面的某些可能的实现方式中,在所述第二网络设备接收所述UE发送的第二测量报告之前,还包括:With reference to the third aspect, in some possible implementation manners of the third aspect, before the second network device receives the second measurement report sent by the UE, the method further includes:
所述第二网络设备向所述UE发送测量控制消息,以指示所述UE进行异***测量。The second network device sends a measurement control message to the UE to instruct the UE to perform an inter-system measurement.
结合第三方面,在第三方面的某些可能的实现方式中,还包括:With reference to the third aspect, in some possible implementation manners of the third aspect, the method further includes:
所述第二网络设备接收所述第一网络设备发送的切换指示信息,所述切换指示消息包括所述第一网络设备所在的第一网络中的第二节点的标识;The second network device receives the handover indication information that is sent by the first network device, where the handover indication message includes an identifier of the second node in the first network where the first network device is located;
所述第二网络设备根据所述切换指示信息,向所述UE发送切换命令,所述切换命令包括所述第二节点的标识,所述切换命令用于指示所述UE与所述第二节点进行数据传输。The second network device sends a handover command to the UE according to the handover indication information, where the handover command includes an identifier of the second node, where the handover command is used to indicate the UE and the second node. Data transfer.
结合第三方面,在第三方面的某些可能的实现方式中,所述切换指示消息还包括:With reference to the third aspect, in some possible implementation manners of the third aspect, the handover indication message further includes:
所述第一网络设备为所述UE配置的传输资源信息,和/或,所述第一网络设备为所述UE分配的新的ID。The first network device is configured to transmit resource information of the UE, and/or the new ID that the first network device allocates to the UE.
第四方面,提供了一种网络设备,所述网络设备为第一网络设备,包括:In a fourth aspect, a network device is provided, where the network device is a first network device, and includes:
发送单元,用于向用户设备UE当前服务小区的第二网络设备发送专用连接标识DCID,以使得所述第二网络设备将所述DCID转发至所述UE,其中,所述DCID用于所述第一网络设备标识所述UE;a sending unit, configured to send, to the second network device that is currently serving the cell of the user equipment UE, a dedicated connection identifier DCID, so that the second network device forwards the DCID to the UE, where the DCID is used by the The first network device identifies the UE;
还用于向所述第二网络设备发送上行参考信号的时频资源配置,以使得所述第二网络设备将所述上行参考信号的时频资源配置转发至所述UE;And is further configured to send a time-frequency resource configuration of the uplink reference signal to the second network device, so that the second network device forwards the time-frequency resource configuration of the uplink reference signal to the UE;
还用于向所述第二网络设备发送切换指示消息,所述切换指示消息包括所述第一网络设备所在的第一网络中的第二节点的标识,以使得所述UE与所述第二节点进行数据传输。And the method is further configured to send, to the second network device, a handover indication message, where the handover indication message includes an identifier of a second node in a first network where the first network device is located, so that the UE and the second The node performs data transmission.
第四方面所述的该网络设备能够实现前述第一方面及其各个实现方式所述的用于小区切换的方法。The network device according to the fourth aspect is capable of implementing the method for cell handover described in the foregoing first aspect and various implementation manners thereof.
结合第四方面,在第四方面的某些可能的实现方式中,还包括接收单元和处理单元,With reference to the fourth aspect, in some possible implementation manners of the fourth aspect, the receiving unit and the processing unit are further included.
所述发送单元,还用于将测量指示消息发送给第一节点,指示所述第一节点测量所述UE发送的上行参考信号,所述测量指示消息携带所述DCID和所述上行参考信号的时频资源配置;The sending unit is further configured to send the measurement indication message to the first node, where the first node is configured to measure an uplink reference signal sent by the UE, where the measurement indication message carries the DCID and the uplink reference signal Time-frequency resource configuration;
所述接收单元,用于接收所述第一节点发送的第一测量报告,所述第一测量报告携带所述UE发送的所述上行参考信号的测量结果;The receiving unit is configured to receive a first measurement report sent by the first node, where the first measurement report carries a measurement result of the uplink reference signal sent by the UE;
所述处理单元,用于根据所述第一节点的第一测量报告,为所述UE分配所述第二节点。The processing unit is configured to allocate the second node to the UE according to the first measurement report of the first node.
结合第四方面,在第四方面的某些可能的实现方式中,所述处理单元,具体用于:判 断所述第一节点的第一测量报告携带的所述测量结果是否满足切换门限;如果所述第一节点的第一测量报告携带的所述测量结果满足所述切换门限,则为所述UE分配所述第二节点。With reference to the fourth aspect, in some possible implementation manners of the fourth aspect, the processing unit is specifically configured to: Determining whether the measurement result carried by the first measurement report of the first node meets a handover threshold; if the measurement result carried by the first measurement report of the first node meets the handover threshold, the UE is Allocating the second node.
结合第四方面,在第四方面的某些可能的实现方式中,所述处理单元,具体用于:判断在预设时长内的所述第一节点的第一测量报告携带的所述测量结果是否满足所述切换门限。With reference to the fourth aspect, in some possible implementation manners of the fourth aspect, the processing unit is configured to: determine the measurement result carried by the first measurement report of the first node within a preset duration Whether the switching threshold is met.
结合第四方面,在第四方面的某些可能的实现方式中,所述接收单元,还用于:从所述第二网络设备接收所述预设时长。In conjunction with the fourth aspect, in some possible implementation manners of the fourth aspect, the receiving unit is further configured to: receive the preset duration from the second network device.
结合第四方面,在第四方面的某些可能的实现方式中,所述接收单元,还用于:从所述第二网络设备接收所述切换门限。In conjunction with the fourth aspect, in some possible implementation manners of the fourth aspect, the receiving unit is further configured to: receive the handover threshold from the second network device.
结合第四方面,在第四方面的某些可能的实现方式中,还包括接收单元,用于:接收所述第二网络设备发送的测量请求;其中,所述DCID和所述上行参考信号的时频资源配置包括在与所述测量请求对应的测量响应中。With reference to the fourth aspect, in some possible implementation manners of the fourth aspect, the method further includes: a receiving unit, configured to: receive a measurement request sent by the second network device, where the DCID and the uplink reference signal are The time-frequency resource configuration is included in the measurement response corresponding to the measurement request.
结合第四方面,在第四方面的某些可能的实现方式中,所述切换指示消息还包括:所述第一网络设备为所述UE配置的传输资源信息,和/或,所述第一网络设备为所述UE分配的新的ID。With reference to the fourth aspect, in some possible implementation manners of the fourth aspect, the handover indication message further includes: transmission resource information configured by the first network device for the UE, and/or the first A new ID assigned by the network device to the UE.
结合第四方面,在第四方面的某些可能的实现方式中,还包括接收单元和处理单元,With reference to the fourth aspect, in some possible implementation manners of the fourth aspect, the receiving unit and the processing unit are further included.
所述发送单元,还用于向所述第二网络设备发送TA测试指令,以便于所述第二网络设备指示所述UE发送TA测试消息;The sending unit is further configured to send a TA test instruction to the second network device, so that the second network device instructs the UE to send a TA test message;
所述接收单元,用于接收所述UE发送的所述TA测试消息;The receiving unit is configured to receive the TA test message sent by the UE;
所述处理单元,用于根据所述TA测试消息,确定TA值;The processing unit is configured to determine a TA value according to the TA test message;
所述发送单元,还用于将所述TA值发送至所述UE。The sending unit is further configured to send the TA value to the UE.
结合第四方面,在第四方面的某些可能的实现方式中,所述发送单元,具体用于:将所述TA值发送至所述第二网络设备,以使得所述第二网络设备将所述TA值转发至所述UE。With reference to the fourth aspect, in some possible implementation manners of the fourth aspect, the sending unit is specifically configured to: send the TA value to the second network device, so that the second network device The TA value is forwarded to the UE.
第五方面,提供了一种网络设备,该装置包括:处理器、存储器和收发器。该存储器用于存储代码,处理器用于执行所述存储器中的代码,当所述代码被执行时,所述处理器可以实现前述第一方面及各个实现方式所述的用于小区切换的方法。In a fifth aspect, a network device is provided, the device comprising: a processor, a memory, and a transceiver. The memory is for storing code, the processor is for executing code in the memory, and when the code is executed, the processor can implement the method for cell switching described in the foregoing first aspect and various implementation manners.
第六方面,提供了一种计算机可读存储介质,所述计算机可读存储介质存储有程序,所述程序使得网络设备执行上述第一方面,及其各种实现方式中的任一种用于小区切换的方法。In a sixth aspect, a computer readable storage medium is provided, the computer readable storage medium storing a program causing a network device to perform the first aspect described above, and any of its various implementations for The method of cell handover.
第七方面,提供了一种***芯片,所述***芯片包括输入接口、输出接口、至少一个处理器、存储器,所述输入接口、输出接口、所述处理器以及所述存储器之间通过总线相连,所述处理器用于执行所述存储器中的代码,当所述代码被执行时,所述处理器实现上述第一方面,及其各种实现方式中的任一种由第一网络设备执行的方法。According to a seventh aspect, a system chip is provided, where the system chip includes an input interface, an output interface, at least one processor, and a memory, and the input interface, the output interface, the processor, and the memory are connected by a bus. The processor is operative to execute code in the memory, the processor implementing the first aspect described above, and any of its various implementations being performed by a first network device when the code is executed method.
第八方面,提供了一种用户设备,包括:In an eighth aspect, a user equipment is provided, including:
接收单元,用于接收当前服务小区的第二网络设备发送的第一无线资源控制RRC配置消息,所述第一RRC配置消息包括专用连接标识DCID,所述DCID用于第一网络设备标识所述UE; a receiving unit, configured to receive a first radio resource control RRC configuration message sent by a second network device of the current serving cell, where the first RRC configuration message includes a dedicated connection identifier DCID, where the DCID is used by the first network device identifier UE;
所述接收单元,还用于接收所述第二网络设备发送的第二RRC配置消息,所述第二RRC配置消息包括上行参考信号的时频资源配置;The receiving unit is further configured to receive a second RRC configuration message sent by the second network device, where the second RRC configuration message includes a time-frequency resource configuration of an uplink reference signal;
发送单元,用于根据所述第一RRC配置消息和所述第二RRC配置消息发送上行参考信号;a sending unit, configured to send an uplink reference signal according to the first RRC configuration message and the second RRC configuration message;
所述接收单元,还用于接收所述第二网络设备发送的切换命令,所述切换命令包括所述第一网络设备为所述UE所分配的第二节点的标识;The receiving unit is further configured to receive a handover command sent by the second network device, where the handover command includes an identifier of a second node that is allocated by the first network device to the UE;
处理单元,用于根据所述切换命令,与所述第二节点进行数据传输。And a processing unit, configured to perform data transmission with the second node according to the switching command.
所述第八方面的该UE能够实现前述第二方面及其各个实现方式所述的用于小区切换的方法。The UE of the eighth aspect is capable of implementing the method for cell handover described in the foregoing second aspect and various implementation manners thereof.
结合第八方面,在第八方面的某些可能的实现方式中,所述处理单元,还用于:执行异***检测;并根据所述异***检测的结果生成第二测量报告,所述第二测量报告包括第一网络设备所在的第一网络的小区ID;所述发送单元,还用于向所述第二网络设备发送所述第二测量报告。With reference to the eighth aspect, in some possible implementation manners of the eighth aspect, the processing unit is further configured to: perform an inter-system detection; and generate a second measurement report according to the result of the different system detection, where The second measurement report includes a cell ID of the first network where the first network device is located, and the sending unit is further configured to send the second measurement report to the second network device.
结合第八方面,在第八方面的某些可能的实现方式中,所述处理单元执行异***检测,具体用于:在满足触发条件时,执行所述异***检测;或者,周期性地执行所述异***检测。With reference to the eighth aspect, in some possible implementation manners of the eighth aspect, the processing unit performs the detection of the different system, specifically, when the trigger condition is met, performing the different system detection; or performing periodically The heterogeneous system detects.
结合第八方面,在第八方面的某些可能的实现方式中,所述触发条件为:所述UE检测到的所述第二网络设备的信号质量低于预设的门限。In conjunction with the eighth aspect, in some possible implementation manners of the eighth aspect, the triggering condition is: the signal quality of the second network device detected by the UE is lower than a preset threshold.
结合第八方面,在第八方面的某些可能的实现方式中,所述接收单元,还用于接收所述第二网络设备发送的测量控制消息;所述处理单元,具体用于根据所述测量控制消息执行所述异***测量。With reference to the eighth aspect, in some possible implementation manners of the eighth aspect, the receiving unit is further configured to receive a measurement control message that is sent by the second network device, where the processing unit is specifically configured to The measurement control message performs the different system measurement.
结合第八方面,在第八方面的某些可能的实现方式中,所述处理单元,具体用于:执行异***检测,并检测到所述第一网络中的第一节点发送的主同步信号PSS、辅同步信号SSS、所述第一网络的下行参考信号、***信息SI中的至少一项。With reference to the eighth aspect, in some possible implementation manners of the eighth aspect, the processing unit is configured to: perform an inter-system detection, and detect a primary synchronization signal sent by the first node in the first network. At least one of a PSS, a secondary synchronization signal SSS, a downlink reference signal of the first network, and system information SI.
结合第八方面,在第八方面的某些可能的实现方式中,所述发送单元,还用于向所述第一网络设备发送时间提前量TA测试消息;所述接收单元,还用于接收所述第一网络设备发送的TA值。With reference to the eighth aspect, in some possible implementation manners of the eighth aspect, the sending unit is further configured to send a timing advance TA test message to the first network device, where the receiving unit is further configured to receive The TA value sent by the first network device.
结合第八方面,在第八方面的某些可能的实现方式中,所述TA值包括在所述第二RRC配置消息中。In conjunction with the eighth aspect, in some possible implementation manners of the eighth aspect, the TA value is included in the second RRC configuration message.
结合第八方面,在第八方面的某些可能的实现方式中,所述接收单元,还用于接收所述第二网络设备发送的TA值。In conjunction with the eighth aspect, in some possible implementation manners of the eighth aspect, the receiving unit is further configured to receive a TA value sent by the second network device.
结合第八方面,在第八方面的某些可能的实现方式中,所述第一RRC配置消息与第二RRC配置消息为同一个消息。In conjunction with the eighth aspect, in some possible implementation manners of the eighth aspect, the first RRC configuration message and the second RRC configuration message are the same message.
第九方面,提供了一种UE,该装置包括:处理器、存储器和收发器。该存储器用于存储代码,处理器用于执行所述存储器中的代码,当所述代码被执行时,所述处理器可以实现前述第二方面及各个实现方式所述的用于小区切换的方法。In a ninth aspect, a UE is provided, the apparatus comprising: a processor, a memory, and a transceiver. The memory is for storing code, the processor is for executing code in the memory, and when the code is executed, the processor can implement the method for cell switching described in the foregoing second aspect and various implementation manners.
第十方面,提供了一种计算机可读存储介质,所述计算机可读存储介质存储有程序,所述程序使得UE执行上述第二方面,及其各种实现方式中的任一种用于小区切换的方法。In a tenth aspect, a computer readable storage medium is provided, the computer readable storage medium storing a program, the program causing a UE to perform the second aspect described above, and any one of its various implementations for a cell The method of switching.
第十一方面,提供了一种***芯片,所述***芯片包括输入接口、输出接口、至少一 个处理器、存储器,所述输入接口、输出接口、所述处理器以及所述存储器之间通过总线相连,所述处理器用于执行所述存储器中的代码,当所述代码被执行时,所述处理器实现上述第二方面,及其各种实现方式中的任一种由UE执行的方法。In an eleventh aspect, a system chip is provided, where the system chip includes an input interface, an output interface, and at least one a processor, a memory, the input interface, the output interface, the processor, and the memory are connected by a bus, the processor is configured to execute code in the memory, when the code is executed, The processor implements the method of the second aspect described above, and any of its various implementations, performed by the UE.
第十二方面,提供了一种网络设备,所述网络设备为第二网络设备,包括:According to a twelfth aspect, a network device is provided, where the network device is a second network device, including:
接收单元,用于接收第一网络设备发送的专用连接标识DCID和上行参考信号的时频资源配置,其中,所述DCID用于所述第一网络设备标识用户设备UE;a receiving unit, configured to receive a time-frequency resource configuration of a dedicated connection identifier DCID and an uplink reference signal sent by the first network device, where the DCID is used by the first network device to identify the user equipment UE;
发送单元,用于向所述UE发送第一无线资源控制RRC配置消息,所述第一RRC配置消息包括所述DCID;a sending unit, configured to send a first radio resource control RRC configuration message to the UE, where the first RRC configuration message includes the DCID;
所述发送单元,还用于向所述UE发送第二RRC配置消息,所述第二RRC配置消息包括上行参考信号的时频资源配置,以使得所述UE根据所述第一RRC配置消息和所述第二RRC配置消息发送上行参考信号。The sending unit is further configured to send a second RRC configuration message to the UE, where the second RRC configuration message includes a time-frequency resource configuration of an uplink reference signal, so that the UE is configured according to the first RRC configuration message and The second RRC configuration message sends an uplink reference signal.
所述第十二方面的该网络设备能够实现前述第三方面及其各个实现方式所述的用于小区切换的方法。The network device of the twelfth aspect is capable of implementing the method for cell handover described in the foregoing third aspect and various implementation manners thereof.
结合第十二方面,在第十二方面的某些可能的实现方式中,还包括处理单元:所述处理单元,用于根据所述第二网络设备与所述UE之间的第一时间提前量TA值以及所述第二网络设备与所述第一网络设备之间的第二TA值,确定所述UE与所述第一网络设备之间的第三TA值;所述发送单元,还用于将所述确定的第三TA值发送至所述UE。With reference to the twelfth aspect, in some possible implementation manners of the twelfth aspect, the method further includes: a processing unit, configured to perform, according to a first time advance between the second network device and the UE a quantity TA value and a second TA value between the second network device and the first network device, determining a third TA value between the UE and the first network device; the sending unit, further And for transmitting the determined third TA value to the UE.
结合第十二方面,在第十二方面的某些可能的实现方式中,所述接收单元,还用于接收所述第一网络设备发送的TA值;所述发送单元,还用于将所述TA值发送至所述UE。In conjunction with the twelfth aspect, in some possible implementations of the twelfth aspect, the receiving unit is further configured to receive a TA value sent by the first network device, where the sending unit is further used to The TA value is sent to the UE.
结合第十二方面,在第十二方面的某些可能的实现方式中,所述TA值包括在所述第二RRC配置消息中。In conjunction with the twelfth aspect, in some possible implementations of the twelfth aspect, the TA value is included in the second RRC configuration message.
结合第十二方面,在第十二方面的某些可能的实现方式中,所述第一RRC配置消息与所述第二RRC配置消息为同一个消息。In conjunction with the twelfth aspect, in some possible implementation manners of the twelfth aspect, the first RRC configuration message and the second RRC configuration message are the same message.
结合第十二方面,在第十二方面的某些可能的实现方式中,所述发送单元,还用于向所述UE发送时间提前量TA测试指令,以指示所述UE向所述第一网络设备发送TA测试消息。With reference to the twelfth aspect, in some possible implementation manners of the twelfth aspect, the sending unit is further configured to send a timing advance TA test instruction to the UE, to indicate that the UE is to the first The network device sends a TA test message.
结合第十二方面,在第十二方面的某些可能的实现方式中,所述接收单元,还用于接收所述UE发送的第二测量报告,所述第二测量报告包括第一网络设备所在的第一网络的小区ID;所述发送单元,还用于向所述第一网络设备发送测量请求;所述接收单元,还用于接收所述第一网络设备发送的测量响应,所述测量响应包括所述DCID和上行参考信号的时频资源配置。With reference to the twelfth aspect, in some possible implementation manners of the twelfth aspect, the receiving unit is further configured to receive a second measurement report that is sent by the UE, where the second measurement report includes the first network device a cell ID of the first network, where the sending unit is further configured to send a measurement request to the first network device, where the receiving unit is further configured to receive a measurement response sent by the first network device, The measurement response includes a time-frequency resource configuration of the DCID and the uplink reference signal.
结合第十二方面,在第十二方面的某些可能的实现方式中,所述测量请求包括切换门限,或者,所述测量请求包括切换门限和预设时长。In conjunction with the twelfth aspect, in some possible implementations of the twelfth aspect, the measurement request includes a handover threshold, or the measurement request includes a handover threshold and a preset duration.
结合第十二方面,在第十二方面的某些可能的实现方式中,所述发送单元,还用于向所述UE发送测量控制消息,以指示所述UE进行异***测量。In conjunction with the twelfth aspect, in some possible implementations of the twelfth aspect, the sending unit is further configured to send a measurement control message to the UE to instruct the UE to perform an inter-system measurement.
结合第十二方面,在第十二方面的某些可能的实现方式中,所述接收单元,还用于接收所述第一网络设备发送的切换指示信息,所述切换指示消息包括所述第一网络设备所在的第一网络中的第二节点的标识;所述发送单元,还用于根据所述切换指示信息,向所述UE发送切换命令,所述切换命令包括所述第二节点的标识,所述切换命令用于指示所述 UE与所述第二节点进行数据传输。With reference to the twelfth aspect, in some possible implementations of the twelfth aspect, the receiving unit is further configured to receive, by the first network device, handover indication information, where the handover indication message includes the An identifier of the second node in the first network where the network device is located; the sending unit is further configured to send a handover command to the UE according to the handover indication information, where the handover command includes the second node Identifying, the switching command is used to indicate the The UE performs data transmission with the second node.
结合第十二方面,在第十二方面的某些可能的实现方式中,所述切换指示消息还包括:所述第一网络设备为所述UE配置的传输资源信息,和/或,所述第一网络设备为所述UE分配的新的ID。In conjunction with the twelfth aspect, in some possible implementations of the twelfth aspect, the handover indication message further includes: transmission resource information configured by the first network device for the UE, and/or The new ID assigned by the first network device to the UE.
第十三方面,提供了一种网络设备,该装置包括:处理器、存储器和收发器。该存储器用于存储代码,处理器用于执行所述存储器中的代码,当所述代码被执行时,所述处理器可以实现前述第三方面及各个实现方式所述的用于小区切换的方法。In a thirteenth aspect, a network device is provided, the device comprising: a processor, a memory, and a transceiver. The memory is for storing code, the processor is for executing code in the memory, and when the code is executed, the processor can implement the method for cell switching described in the foregoing third aspect and various implementation manners.
第十四方面,提供了一种计算机可读存储介质,所述计算机可读存储介质存储有程序,所述程序使得网络设备执行上述第三方面,及其各种实现方式中的任一种用于小区切换的方法。In a fourteenth aspect, a computer readable storage medium is provided, the computer readable storage medium storing a program causing a network device to perform the third aspect described above, and any of the various implementations thereof The method of cell handover.
第十五方面,提供了一种***芯片,所述***芯片包括输入接口、输出接口、至少一个处理器、存储器,所述输入接口、输出接口、所述处理器以及所述存储器之间通过总线相连,所述处理器用于执行所述存储器中的代码,当所述代码被执行时,所述处理器实现上述第三方面,及其各种实现方式中的任一种由第二网络设备执行的方法。According to a fifteenth aspect, a system chip is provided, where the system chip includes an input interface, an output interface, at least one processor, and a memory, and the input interface, the output interface, the processor, and the memory pass through the bus Connected, the processor is operative to execute code in the memory, when the code is executed, the processor implements the third aspect described above, and any of its various implementations are performed by a second network device Methods.
第十六方面,提供了一种通信***,所述通信***包括网络设备,所述网络设备包括上述第四方面至第七方面中的任一种实现方式所述的第一网络设备,和/或,上述第十二方面至第十五方面中的任一种实现方式所述的第二网络设备。In a sixteenth aspect, a communication system is provided, the communication system comprising a network device, the network device comprising the first network device according to any one of the foregoing fourth to seventh aspects, and/ Or the second network device according to any one of the twelfth to fifteenth aspects.
结合第十六方面,在第十六方面的可能的实现方式中,所述通信***还包括用户设备,所述用户设备为上述第八方面至第十一方面中的任一种实现方式所述的UE。In conjunction with the sixteenth aspect, in a possible implementation manner of the sixteenth aspect, the communication system further includes a user equipment, where the user equipment is any one of the foregoing eighth to eleventh aspects UE.
本申请实施例中,第一网络设备可以为NR控制器,第二网络设备可以为LTE中的基站(如eNB),相应地,第一网络设备所在的第一网络可以为NR。第一节点可以为第一TPG中的TP,第二节点可以为第二TPG中的TP。In this embodiment, the first network device may be an NR controller, and the second network device may be a base station (such as an eNB) in the LTE. Correspondingly, the first network where the first network device is located may be an NR. The first node may be a TP in the first TPG, and the second node may be a TP in the second TPG.
附图说明DRAWINGS
图1是本申请实施例的超级小区的一个示意图。FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of a super cell according to an embodiment of the present application.
图2中(a)-(c)是本申请实施例的应用场景的示意图。2(a)-(c) are schematic diagrams of application scenarios of the embodiment of the present application.
图3是本申请实施例的UE从LTE移动至NR的切换的一个示意性流程图。FIG. 3 is a schematic flowchart of a handover of a UE from LTE to NR according to an embodiment of the present application.
图4是本申请实施例的UE从LTE移动至NR的切换的另一个示意性流程图。FIG. 4 is another schematic flowchart of a handover of a UE from LTE to NR according to an embodiment of the present application.
图5是本申请实施例的UE从LTE移动至NR的切换的另一个示意性流程图。FIG. 5 is another schematic flowchart of a handover of a UE from LTE to NR according to an embodiment of the present application.
图6是本申请实施例的UE从LTE移动至NR的切换的另一个示意性流程图。FIG. 6 is another schematic flowchart of a handover of a UE from LTE to NR according to an embodiment of the present application.
图7是本申请实施例的UE从LTE移动至NR的切换的另一个示意性流程图。FIG. 7 is another schematic flowchart of a handover of a UE from LTE to NR according to an embodiment of the present application.
图8是本申请实施例的UE从NR移动至LTE的切换的一个示意性流程图。FIG. 8 is a schematic flowchart of a handover of a UE from NR to LTE according to an embodiment of the present application.
图9是本申请实施例的UE从NR移动至LTE的切换的另一个示意性流程图。FIG. 9 is another schematic flowchart of a handover of a UE from NR to LTE in an embodiment of the present application.
图10是本申请实施例的小区重选的方法的示意性流程图。FIG. 10 is a schematic flowchart of a method for cell reselection according to an embodiment of the present application.
图11是本申请实施例的小区切换的一个示意性流程图。FIG. 11 is a schematic flowchart of cell handover in the embodiment of the present application.
图12是本申请实施例的小区切换的另一个示意性流程图。FIG. 12 is another schematic flowchart of cell handover in the embodiment of the present application.
图13是本申请实施例的小区切换的另一个示意性流程图。FIG. 13 is another schematic flowchart of cell handover in the embodiment of the present application.
图14是本申请实施例的网络设备的一个结构框图。FIG. 14 is a structural block diagram of a network device according to an embodiment of the present application.
图15是本申请实施例的网络设备的另一个结构框图。 FIG. 15 is another structural block diagram of a network device according to an embodiment of the present application.
图16是本申请实施例的UE的一个结构框图。FIG. 16 is a structural block diagram of a UE according to an embodiment of the present application.
图17是本申请实施例的UE的另一个结构框图。FIG. 17 is another structural block diagram of a UE according to an embodiment of the present application.
图18是本申请实施例的网络设备的一个结构框图。FIG. 18 is a structural block diagram of a network device according to an embodiment of the present application.
图19是本申请实施例的网络设备的另一个结构框图。FIG. 19 is another structural block diagram of a network device according to an embodiment of the present application.
图20是本申请实施例的***芯片的示意性结构图。FIG. 20 is a schematic structural diagram of a system chip according to an embodiment of the present application.
图21是本申请实施例的***芯片的示意性结构图。FIG. 21 is a schematic structural diagram of a system chip according to an embodiment of the present application.
图22是本申请实施例的***芯片的示意性结构图。FIG. 22 is a schematic structural diagram of a system chip according to an embodiment of the present application.
具体实施方式detailed description
下面将结合附图,对本申请中的技术方案进行描述。The technical solutions in the present application will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings.
应理解,本申请的技术方案可以应用于各种通信***,例如:全球移动通讯(Global System of Mobile communication,GSM)***、码分多址(Code Division Multiple Access,CDMA)***、宽带码分多址(Wideband Code Division Multiple Access,WCDMA)***、通用分组无线业务(General Packet Radio Service,GPRS)、长期演进(Long Term Evolution,LTE)***、先进的长期演进(Advanced long term evolution,LTE-A)***、通用移动通信***(Universal Mobile Telecommunication System,UMTS)、5G等。It should be understood that the technical solution of the present application can be applied to various communication systems, for example, a Global System of Mobile communication (GSM) system, a Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA) system, and a wideband code division. Wideband Code Division Multiple Access (WCDMA) system, General Packet Radio Service (GPRS), Long Term Evolution (LTE) system, Advanced Long Term Evolution (LTE-A) System, Universal Mobile Telecommunication System (UMTS), 5G, etc.
还应理解,在本申请实施例中,用户设备(User Equipment,UE)包括但不限于移动台(Mobile Station,MS)、移动终端(Mobile Terminal)、移动电话(Mobile Telephone)、手机(handset)及便携设备(portable equipment)等,该用户设备可以经无线接入网(Radio Access Network,RAN)与一个或多个核心网进行通信,例如,用户设备可以是移动电话(或称为“蜂窝”电话)、具有无线通信功能的计算机等,用户设备还可以是便携式、袖珍式、手持式、计算机内置的或者车载的移动装置。It should be understood that, in the embodiment of the present application, the user equipment (User Equipment, UE) includes but is not limited to a mobile station (Mobile Station, MS), a mobile terminal (Mobile Terminal), a mobile telephone (Mobile Telephone), a mobile phone (handset). And portable devices, etc., the user equipment can communicate with one or more core networks via a Radio Access Network (RAN), for example, the user equipment can be a mobile phone (or "cellular" The telephone device, the computer with wireless communication function, etc., the user equipment can also be a mobile device that is portable, pocket-sized, handheld, built-in, or in-vehicle.
新无线(New Radio,NR)***,也可以称为下一代无线(Next Radio)***或下一代网络等,NR中的小区可以为超级小区(hyper cell),如图1所示,hyper cell可以配置有hyper cell ID,且hyper cell可以包括同频和/或异频的多个节点,例如节点可以为传输点(Transmission Point,TP),可选地,作为一个实施例,hyper cell中也可仅包括1个TP;或者,hyper cell可以包括多个小区,可选地,作为一个实施例,hyper cell中也可仅包括1个小区。可以理解的是,hyper cell内的TP(或者小区)的ID与hyper cell的ID可以保持一致,也可以分别配置。A new radio (NR) system, which may also be called a Next Radio system or a next-generation network, may be a hyper cell. As shown in FIG. 1, a hyper cell may be used. The hyper cell ID is configured, and the hyper cell may include multiple nodes of the same frequency and/or different frequency. For example, the node may be a transmission point (TP). Alternatively, as an embodiment, the hyper cell may also be used. The TP may include only one TP. Alternatively, the hyper cell may include multiple cells. Optionally, as an embodiment, only one cell may be included in the hyper cell. It can be understood that the ID of the TP (or cell) in the hyper cell can be consistent with the ID of the hyper cell, or can be configured separately.
本申请实施例中,一般地,hyper cell内的TP的公共信息可以配置成一致,比如同步信道,下行参考信道,广播信道等信道发送的内容相同,UE在hyper cell内移动时,由于hyper cell内的TP的公共信息相同,UE对服务小区的变化无感知。比如,具体地,UE无需测量hyper cell中的各小区发送的下行参考信号,相反,由UE发送上行参考信号,网络侧测量UE的上行参考信号,并基于测量结果为UE选择一个或多个TP进行数据传输。也就是说,UE在hyper cell移动的过程中,测量上行参考信号、TP切换的任务可以由网络侧完成,尽量让UE不感知TP的变换,相当于引入“no cell”的工作模式,这样不但能够保证业务的连续性,而且能够减少空口信令的开销,UE无需承担繁重的测量任务,设计复杂度也相应降低。In the embodiment of the present application, the common information of the TP in the hyper cell may be configured to be consistent. For example, the content of the channel transmitted by the channel such as the synchronization channel, the downlink reference channel, and the broadcast channel is the same, and the UE moves in the hyper cell due to the hyper cell. The public information of the TP is the same, and the UE has no perception of the change of the serving cell. For example, the UE does not need to measure the downlink reference signal sent by each cell in the hyper cell. Instead, the UE sends an uplink reference signal, and the network side measures the uplink reference signal of the UE, and selects one or more TPs for the UE based on the measurement result. Data transfer. That is to say, in the process of moving the hyper cell, the task of measuring the uplink reference signal and the TP handover can be completed by the network side, and the UE is not aware of the TP transformation as much as possible, which is equivalent to introducing the "no cell" working mode, so that not only the working mode is introduced, but not only the "no cell" is introduced. It can ensure the continuity of services, and can reduce the overhead of air interface signaling. The UE does not need to undertake heavy measurement tasks, and the design complexity is also reduced accordingly.
可见,在NR中,UE不再执行下行测量,而是由网络基于UE上行参考信号对UE和 网络的链路质量做测量和评估。因此,一般来说,NR***中不需要再频繁发送下行参考信号,不仅降低了小区间干扰,还可以进一步地提高网络资源利用率。It can be seen that in the NR, the UE does not perform downlink measurement, but is based on the UE uplink reference signal to the UE and The link quality of the network is measured and evaluated. Therefore, in general, the NR system does not need to frequently transmit downlink reference signals, which not only reduces inter-cell interference, but also further improves network resource utilization.
在超级小区中,NR控制器(NR Controller)会为UE分配专用连接标识(Dedicated Connection Identity,DCID),超级小区可以根据DCID识别UE。也就是说,NR控制器可以基于该DCID唯一地标识该UE。例如,超级小区中TP可以基于DCID为UE提供数据通信服务;超级小区中的TP还可以基于DCID识别并测量UE发送的上行参考信号。具体地,DCID可以简称为专用标识(Dedicated Identity,DID),或者可以称为专用用户标识(Dedicated User Identity,DUI),可以是C-RNTI,hyper cell ID,TP ID,cell ID,新定义的ID等标识中的任一个或者任意几个的组合。In the super cell, the NR controller allocates a Dedicated Connection Identity (DCID) to the UE, and the super cell can identify the UE according to the DCID. That is, the NR controller can uniquely identify the UE based on the DCID. For example, the TP in the super cell may provide a data communication service for the UE based on the DCID; the TP in the super cell may also identify and measure the uplink reference signal sent by the UE based on the DCID. Specifically, the DCID may be simply referred to as a Dedicated Identity (DID), or may be referred to as a Dedicated User Identity (DUI), which may be a C-RNTI, a hyper cell ID, a TP ID, a cell ID, and a newly defined Any one of IDs and the like or a combination of any of them.
在NR中,可以由新无线的控制器(New Radio controller,NR controller)为UE提供移动性管理,该NR controller可以是接入网侧的独立的网元,或逻辑网元,或集中式网元(Centralized Unit),或新无线基站,但本申请实施例不限于此。例如,NR controller可以与TP集合成在同一实体中,比如称之为接入网设备,TP可以是该接入网设备的发射和接收单元;或者,NR controller也可以是TP,该TP可以是或不是为UE提供数据传输服务的TP集合中的TP,当是的时候,NR controller可以直接发送信令给UE。In the NR, the UE may be provided with mobility management by a new radio controller (NR controller), which may be an independent network element on the access network side, or a logical network element, or a centralized network. A Centralized Unit, or a new wireless base station, but the embodiment of the present application is not limited thereto. For example, the NR controller may be in the same entity as the TP, such as an access network device, and the TP may be a transmitting and receiving unit of the access network device; or the NR controller may be a TP, and the TP may be Or not the TP in the TP set of the data transmission service provided by the UE. When yes, the NR controller can directly send signaling to the UE.
应理解,本申请实施例对节点的具体类型不作限定,例如,可以是普通的基站(如NodeB或eNB),可以是射频拉远模块,可以是微基站(pico),可以是中继(relay),可以是分布式网元(Distributed Unit),可以是TP,可以是DU和TP,或者任何其它无线接入设备。本申请实施例中,节点可以具有全部或部分层二协议栈功能,或者节点可以具有全部或部分层二协议以及物理层协议栈功能。其中,层二协议可以包括:分组数据汇聚协议(Packet Data Convergence Protocol,PDCP)、无线链路控制(Radio Link Control,RLC)、媒体接入控制(Medium Access Control,MAC)中的至少一种。即,层二协议可以为PDCP,或RLC,或MAC,或PDCP和RLC,或PDCP和MAC,或RLC和MAC,或PDCP和RLC和MAC。例如,节点可以是具有全部或部分层二协议的接收点(Transmission Reception Point,TRP)或传输点(Transmission Point,TP),或者节点可以是具有全部或部分层二协议以及物理层协议的接收点或传输点。It should be understood that the specific type of the node is not limited in the embodiment of the present application. For example, it may be a normal base station (such as a NodeB or an eNB), may be a radio remote module, may be a pico base station, or may be a relay. ), which may be a distributed network unit, may be a TP, may be a DU and a TP, or any other wireless access device. In this embodiment of the present application, the node may have all or part of the layer 2 protocol stack function, or the node may have all or part of the layer 2 protocol and the physical layer protocol stack function. The Layer 2 protocol may include at least one of a Packet Data Convergence Protocol (PDCP), a Radio Link Control (RLC), and a Medium Access Control (MAC). That is, the layer two protocol may be PDCP, or RLC, or MAC, or PDCP and RLC, or PDCP and MAC, or RLC and MAC, or PDCP and RLC and MAC. For example, the node may be a Transmission Reception Point (TRP) or a Transmission Point (TP) having all or part of the Layer 2 protocol, or the node may be a receiving point having all or part of the Layer 2 protocol and the physical layer protocol. Or transmission point.
本申请后续的实施例中以节点是TP为例进行阐述,可理解,如果节点是DU和TP,那么NR控制器和DU交互,然后由各DU再和TP进一步交互,即NR控制器和TP的交互需要通过DU进行。In the following embodiments of the present application, the node is a TP as an example. It can be understood that if the node is a DU and a TP, the NR controller interacts with the DU, and then the DU further interacts with the TP, that is, the NR controller and the TP. The interaction needs to be done through the DU.
然而由于NR是以用户为中心的***,当UE在以网络为中心的***与以用户为中心的***之间移动时,如何实现切换成为技术瓶颈。However, since NR is a user-centric system, how to implement handover becomes a technical bottleneck when the UE moves between a network-centric system and a user-centric system.
本申请实施例以LTE为例作为一种以网络为中心的***进行阐述,如图2中(a)至(c)所示,为LTE与NR之间的位置关系的示意图。可理解,其中的LTE只是示意性的,也可以是其他的以网络为中心的***,这里不做限定。The embodiment of the present application uses LTE as an example to describe a network-centric system. As shown in (a) to (c) of FIG. 2, it is a schematic diagram of a positional relationship between LTE and NR. It can be understood that the LTE is only schematic, and may be other network-centric systems, which are not limited herein.
在如图2所示的网络架构,随着UE的移动,UE会在LTE和NR之间进行切换,并且UE期望能够提供连续的服务。In the network architecture shown in FIG. 2, as the UE moves, the UE will switch between LTE and NR, and the UE expects to be able to provide continuous service.
当UE从LTE移动至NR时,是否驻留到NR***是由NR***对UE上行SRS的测量质量确定的,UE在LTE中可以配置周期性的SRS,为了减少不必要的浪费,最好是UE在NR***的覆盖时才开始发送SRS;另外SRS的发送配置需要LTE和NR***交互。 当UE从NR移动至LTE时,也需要及时配置UE开启下行测量和上报功能;NR***如果不支持UE侧的测量报告,还需要和LTE进行交互。When the UE moves from LTE to NR, whether to camp on the NR system is determined by the NR system's measurement quality of the UE uplink SRS, and the UE may configure periodic SRS in LTE. In order to reduce unnecessary waste, it is preferable to The UE starts transmitting SRS only when the NR system covers; in addition, the SRS transmission configuration requires LTE and NR system interaction. When the UE moves from the NR to the LTE, the UE needs to be configured to enable the downlink measurement and reporting function in time; if the NR system does not support the measurement report on the UE side, it needs to interact with the LTE.
图3是本申请实施例的UE从LTE移动至NR的切换的一个示意性流程图。应理解,图3示出了应用于从LTE切换到NR的详细的通信步骤或操作,但这些步骤或操作仅是示例,本申请实施例还可以执行其它操作或者图3中的各种操作的变形。此外,图3中的各个步骤可以按照与图3呈现的不同的顺序来执行,并且有可能并非要执行图3中的全部操作。图3中示出了UE 10、eNB 20、NR控制器30和TP 40,其中,TP 40可以为多个。图3所示的方法可以包括:FIG. 3 is a schematic flowchart of a handover of a UE from LTE to NR according to an embodiment of the present application. It should be understood that FIG. 3 illustrates detailed communication steps or operations applied to switch from LTE to NR, but these steps or operations are merely examples, and other embodiments of the present application may perform other operations or various operations in FIG. Deformation. Moreover, the various steps in FIG. 3 may be performed in a different order than that presented in FIG. 3, and it is possible that not all operations in FIG. 3 are to be performed. The UE 10, the eNB 20, the NR controller 30, and the TP 40 are shown in FIG. 3, where the TP 40 may be multiple. The method shown in Figure 3 can include:
S102,UE 10执行异***检测。S102. The UE 10 performs heterogeneous system detection.
本申请实施例中,UE 10初始处于LTE的服务小区内,初始的服务基站为eNB 20。In the embodiment of the present application, the UE 10 is initially in the serving cell of the LTE, and the initial serving base station is the eNB 20.
可选地,UE 10可以周期性地执行异***检测,或者,UE 10可以在满足触发条件时执行异***检测。Alternatively, the UE 10 may perform inter-system detection periodically, or the UE 10 may perform inter-system detection when the trigger condition is met.
本申请实施例中,UE 10可以根据eNB 20的配置执行S102。具体地,在S102之前,UE 10接收eNB 20发送的测量控制消息(或基站配置消息)。并在S102中,UE 10根据该测量控制消息(或基站配置消息)执行异***测量。In the embodiment of the present application, the UE 10 may perform S102 according to the configuration of the eNB 20. Specifically, before S102, the UE 10 receives the measurement control message (or base station configuration message) sent by the eNB 20. And in S102, the UE 10 performs the heterogeneous system measurement according to the measurement control message (or the base station configuration message).
作为一例,UE 20可以周期性地执行异***测量。可选地,在S102之前,UE 10可以接收eNB 20发送的测量控制消息,该测量控制消息指示UE 20周期性地执行异***测量;进一步地,UE 10可以根据该测量控制消息执行异***测量。可理解,该测量控制消息可以包括周期大小等。例如,该实施例可以应用于对于图2中(a)和图2中(b)所示的场景。As an example, the UE 20 may periodically perform an inter-system measurement. Optionally, before S102, the UE 10 may receive a measurement control message sent by the eNB 20, the measurement control message instructing the UE 20 to perform the inter-system measurement periodically; further, the UE 10 may perform the hetero-system measurement according to the measurement control message. . It can be understood that the measurement control message can include a cycle size or the like. For example, this embodiment can be applied to the scenes shown in (a) of FIG. 2 and (b) of FIG. 2.
作为另一例,UE 20可以在满足触发条件时执行异***测量。可选地,在S102之前,UE 10可以接收eNB 20发送的测量控制消息,该测量控制消息指示UE 20执行异***测量的触发条件;进一步地,UE 10可以根据该测量控制消息执行异***测量。其中,触发条件可以为:UE 10检测到的eNB 20的信号质量低于预设的门限。可理解,该测量控制消息可以包括该门限的大小等。例如,该实施例可以应用于对于图2中(b)和图2中(c)所示的场景。As another example, the UE 20 may perform an inter-system measurement when the trigger condition is met. Optionally, before S102, the UE 10 may receive a measurement control message sent by the eNB 20, where the measurement control message indicates that the UE 20 performs a trigger condition for the inter-system measurement; further, the UE 10 may perform the hetero-system measurement according to the measurement control message. . The triggering condition may be that the signal quality of the eNB 20 detected by the UE 10 is lower than a preset threshold. It can be understood that the measurement control message can include the size of the threshold and the like. For example, this embodiment can be applied to the scenes shown in (b) of FIG. 2 and (c) of FIG. 2.
其中,eNB 20可以通过广播或单播的形式发送测量控制消息。举例来说,eNB 20可以根据UE的位置,将测量控制消息发送至位于eNB 20服务范围的边缘的一个或多个UE。The eNB 20 may send the measurement control message in the form of broadcast or unicast. For example, the eNB 20 may send a measurement control message to one or more UEs located at the edge of the eNB 20 service range based on the location of the UE.
这里,UE 10执行异***测量是指:UE 10检测NR信息等。例如,UE 10根据配置检测NR,发现NR的TP发送的主同步信号(Primary Synchronization Signal,PSS)、辅同步信号(Secondary Synchronization Signal,SSS)、NR下行参考信号、***信息(System Information,SI)等中的至少一种,并根据所发现的这些信号读取NR信息。Here, the UE 10 performing the inter-system measurement means that the UE 10 detects the NR information and the like. For example, the UE 10 detects the NR according to the configuration, and finds a Primary Synchronization Signal (PSS), a Secondary Synchronization Signal (SSS), an NR downlink reference signal, and System Information (SI) of the NR TP transmission. At least one of the others, and reading the NR information based on the signals found.
其中,NR信息包括NR小区ID,可选地,该NR小区ID可以为前述的hyper cell ID,TP ID,或者也可以为其他的用于唯一标识该NR小区的其他标识或物理小区标识(Physical Cell ID)等,本申请对此不限定。这里,NR小区ID也可以称为全球NR小区ID。另外,NR信息还可以进一步包括NR***的带宽和/或频带等。The NR information includes an NR cell ID. Optionally, the NR cell ID may be the aforementioned hyper cell ID, TP ID, or other identifiers or physical cell identifiers (Physical) for uniquely identifying the NR cell. Cell ID) and the like, this application is not limited thereto. Here, the NR cell ID may also be referred to as a global NR cell ID. In addition, the NR information may further include a bandwidth and/or a frequency band of the NR system and the like.
S104,UE 10向eNB 20发送第二测量报告。S104. The UE 10 sends a second measurement report to the eNB 20.
可理解,在S102之前,UE 10可以根据异***测量的结果生成第二测量报告。并随后在S104中,将该第二测量报告发送至eNB 20。It can be understood that before S102, the UE 10 can generate a second measurement report according to the result of the different system measurement. And then in S104, the second measurement report is sent to the eNB 20.
其中,该第二测量报告可以包括NR信息,进一步地,该第二测量报告也可以进一步 包括UE 10检测到的当前eNB 20的信号质量。其中,当前eNB 20的信号质量即当前服务小区的信号质量,或者也可以称为是当前LTE小区的信号质量。The second measurement report may include NR information, and further, the second measurement report may further The signal quality of the current eNB 20 detected by the UE 10 is included. The signal quality of the current eNB 20 is the signal quality of the current serving cell, or may be referred to as the signal quality of the current LTE cell.
也就是说,第二测量报告包括NR小区ID。可选地,第二测量报告还可以包括NR***的带宽和/或频带;可选地,第二测量报告还可以包括当前服务小区(即LTE的小区)的信号质量;可选地,第二测量报告还可以包括NR小区的信号质量。That is, the second measurement report includes the NR cell ID. Optionally, the second measurement report may further include a bandwidth and/or a frequency band of the NR system; optionally, the second measurement report may further include a signal quality of the current serving cell (ie, a cell of the LTE); optionally, the second The measurement report may also include the signal quality of the NR cell.
可见,本申请实施例中,引入了一种新的异***测量报告触发机制或异***发现机制,即仅检测到异***存在,就触发异***测量报告。不需要像legacy机制中,必须异***的质量满足门限才可以触发异***测量报告。It can be seen that, in the embodiment of the present application, a new heterogeneous system measurement report trigger mechanism or a different system discovery mechanism is introduced, that is, only the detection of the existence of the heterogeneous system triggers the heterogeneous system measurement report. It is not necessary to trigger the heterogeneous measurement report to trigger the heterogeneous system measurement report, as in the legacy mechanism, where the quality of the different system must meet the threshold.
本申请实施例中,异***检测的触发机制,可以类似legacy,当UE检测到当前LTE质量低于某一门限时,启动异***测量;或者,LTE配置UE周期性的检测NR,或者LTE根据UE的位置信息配置UE启动检测NR等。In the embodiment of the present application, the trigger mechanism of the detection of the different system may be similar to legacy. When the UE detects that the current LTE quality is lower than a certain threshold, the UE detects the NR, or the LTE configures the UE to periodically detect the NR, or the LTE according to the LTE. The location information of the UE configures the UE to start detecting NR and the like.
S106,eNB 20向NR控制器30发送测量请求。S106, the eNB 20 sends a measurement request to the NR controller 30.
当eNB 20接收到UE 10的第二测量报告时,可以获知UE 10已经检测到相邻的NR小区,便发送测量请求至NR控制器30。以便于NR控制器30对UE 10发送上行参考信号等进行配置。When the eNB 20 receives the second measurement report of the UE 10, it can learn that the UE 10 has detected the adjacent NR cell, and sends a measurement request to the NR controller 30. The NR controller 30 is configured to transmit an uplink reference signal or the like to the UE 10.
其中,测量请求也可以称为测量配置请求或者测量配置请求消息。The measurement request may also be referred to as a measurement configuration request or a measurement configuration request message.
可选地,该测量请求还可以包括UE 10的位置信息。Optionally, the measurement request may further include location information of the UE 10.
可选地,该测量请求还可以包括切换门限,或者,该测量请求还可以包括切换门限和预设时长。关于该切换门限与预设时长的详细描述可以参见之后的步骤S118。Optionally, the measurement request may further include a handover threshold, or the measurement request may further include a handover threshold and a preset duration. A detailed description of the switching threshold and the preset duration can be found in the following step S118.
S108,NR控制器30向eNB 20发送测量响应。S108, the NR controller 30 transmits a measurement response to the eNB 20.
可选地,该测量响应可以包括DCID。DCID是NR控制器30为UE 10分配的,用于NR控制器30唯一地标识该UE 10。Optionally, the measurement response can include a DCID. The DCID is assigned by the NR controller 30 to the UE 10 for the NR controller 30 to uniquely identify the UE 10.
可选地,该测量响应还可以包括上行参考信号的时频资源配置。这样,UE 10之后可以根据该时频资源配置发送上行参考信号。Optionally, the measurement response may further include a time-frequency resource configuration of the uplink reference signal. In this way, the UE 10 can then send an uplink reference signal according to the time-frequency resource configuration.
其中,测量响应也可以称为测量配置响应或者测量配置响应消息。The measurement response may also be referred to as a measurement configuration response or a measurement configuration response message.
本申请实施例中,NR控制器30可以根据测量请求进行NR配置,然后将DCID(或者DCID和上行参考信号的时频资源配置)以NR RRC的形式,通过测量响应发送至eNB20。本申请实施例中,以节点是TP进行阐述。如果节点是DU和TP,本申请实施例中的NR控制器和TP的交互,可以是NR控制器30通过DU和TP进行交互,即NR控制器和DU直接交互,然后由DU和TP交互。可以理解地,TPG包括多个TP时,TPG中的TP可以属于同一个或不同的DU。In the embodiment of the present application, the NR controller 30 may perform the NR configuration according to the measurement request, and then send the DCID (or the time-frequency resource configuration of the DCID and the uplink reference signal) to the eNB 20 by using the measurement response in the form of NR RRC. In the embodiment of the present application, the node is a TP. If the node is a DU and a TP, the interaction between the NR controller and the TP in the embodiment of the present application may be that the NR controller 30 interacts through the DU and the TP, that is, the NR controller and the DU directly interact, and then the DU and the TP interact. It can be understood that when the TPG includes multiple TPs, the TPs in the TPG may belong to the same or different DUs.
S110,NR控制器30向第一传输点组(Transmission Point Group,TPG)发送测量指示信息,以指示第一TPG中的TP测量UE发送的上行参考信号。S110. The NR controller 30 sends measurement indication information to the first transmission point group (TPG) to indicate that the TP in the first TPG measures the uplink reference signal sent by the UE.
其中,第一TPG中包括一个或多个TP。测量指示信息可以包括DCID和上行参考信号的时频资源配置。可选地,该测量指示信息还可以进一步包括测量门限。Wherein, the first TPG includes one or more TPs. The measurement indication information may include a time-frequency resource configuration of the DCID and the uplink reference signal. Optionally, the measurement indication information may further include a measurement threshold.
可选地,第一TPG可以是hyper cell的全部最外层TP的集合。Alternatively, the first TPG may be a collection of all outermost TPs of the hyper cell.
可选地,如果S106中的测量请求包括UE的位置信息,在S110中,第一TPG可以是UE所在位置的hyper cell的最外层TP的集合。也就是说,S110中,NR控制器30可以根据UE的位置信息确定第一TPG,然后将测量指示信息发送至第一TPG。 Optionally, if the measurement request in S106 includes the location information of the UE, in S110, the first TPG may be a set of the outermost TP of the hyper cell where the UE is located. That is, in S110, the NR controller 30 may determine the first TPG according to the location information of the UE, and then transmit the measurement indication information to the first TPG.
可选地,测量指示信息还可以包括以下测量配置参数中的至少一种:携带测量标识、测量事件名称、测量间隔、测量报告上报模式、测量上报条件、测量参数。此外,可以为每个DCID(或每个UE)配置一套测量配置参数,也可以为超级小区中的全部DCID(或全部UE)共同配置一套测量配置参数。进一步地,测量配置参数可以包括:上行参考信号的接收质量、上行参考信号的接收功率、信噪比、信号与干扰和噪声比、路损等中的至少一种。测量配置参数还可以包括上述各项参数的门限中的至少一种。当TP检测的测量参数满足测量上报条件时,TP发送测量报告(后续实施例中的第一测量报告),并在测量报告中包含相应的测量结果。测量报告上报模式可以包括:事件触发的上报模式、周期性的上报模式,事件触发上报和周期性上报相结合的模式中的至少一种。其中,事件触发的上报模式可以指:当TP测量到的上行参考信号满足测量配置参数中的门限时,TP向NR控制器发送测量报告。周期性的上报模式可以指TP周期性向NR控制器发送测量报告。Optionally, the measurement indication information may further include at least one of the following measurement configuration parameters: a carried measurement identifier, a measurement event name, a measurement interval, a measurement report reporting mode, a measurement reporting condition, and a measurement parameter. In addition, a set of measurement configuration parameters may be configured for each DCID (or each UE), or a set of measurement configuration parameters may be configured for all DCIDs (or all UEs) in the super cell. Further, the measurement configuration parameter may include at least one of a reception quality of the uplink reference signal, a received power of the uplink reference signal, a signal to noise ratio, a signal to interference and noise ratio, a path loss, and the like. The measurement configuration parameter may also include at least one of the thresholds of the above various parameters. When the measurement parameter detected by the TP satisfies the measurement reporting condition, the TP sends a measurement report (the first measurement report in the subsequent embodiment), and includes the corresponding measurement result in the measurement report. The measurement report reporting mode may include at least one of an event-triggered reporting mode, a periodic reporting mode, an event-triggered reporting, and a periodic reporting mode. The event-triggered reporting mode may be: when the TP measured uplink reference signal meets the threshold in the measurement configuration parameter, the TP sends a measurement report to the NR controller. The periodic reporting mode may refer to the TP periodically sending a measurement report to the NR controller.
当NR控制器为TP配置了上行参考信号的测量配置参数之后,TP就可以依据该测量配置参数对UE发送的上行参考信号进行测量,并依据测量上报模式,将测量结果上报至NR控制器。After the NR controller configures the measurement configuration parameter of the uplink reference signal for the TP, the TP can measure the uplink reference signal sent by the UE according to the measurement configuration parameter, and report the measurement result to the NR controller according to the measurement reporting mode.
需要说明的是,该测量指示信息可以指示TP进行同频测量,也可以指示该TP进行异频测量。或者,NR控制器可以向TP发送同频测量的测量指示信息,也可以向TP发送异频测量的测量指示信息。具体而言,假设TP的工作频点为F1,UE发送上行参考信号的频点为F2,NR控制器可以指示TP进行异频测量,即指示TP在F2上测量UE发送的上行参考信号。或者,作为另一种实现方式,NR控制器也可以指示UE在TP的工作频点,即F1频段发送上行参考信号,然后指示TP进行同频测量。这样,TP仅需要在自己的工作频段测量上行参考信号即可。应理解,以上两种测量方式可以单独使用,也可以结合使用,本申请实施例对此不作具体限定。It should be noted that the measurement indication information may indicate that the TP performs the intra-frequency measurement, and may also instruct the TP to perform the inter-frequency measurement. Alternatively, the NR controller may send the measurement indication information of the intra-frequency measurement to the TP, or may send the measurement indication information of the inter-frequency measurement to the TP. Specifically, it is assumed that the frequency of the TP is F1, and the frequency at which the UE sends the uplink reference signal is F2, and the NR controller can instruct the TP to perform the inter-frequency measurement, that is, the TP is configured to measure the uplink reference signal sent by the UE on the F2. Alternatively, as another implementation manner, the NR controller may also instruct the UE to send an uplink reference signal at the working frequency of the TP, that is, the F1 frequency band, and then instruct the TP to perform the same frequency measurement. In this way, the TP only needs to measure the uplink reference signal in its own working frequency band. It should be understood that the above two measurement methods may be used alone or in combination, and the embodiment of the present application does not specifically limit this.
S112,eNB 20向UE 10发送第一RRC配置消息。S112. The eNB 20 sends a first RRC configuration message to the UE 10.
其中,如果测量响应包括DCID,则该第一RRC配置消息包括DCID。如果测量响应包括DCID和上行参考信号的时频资源配置,则该第一RRC配置消息包括DCID和上行参考信号的时频资源配置。Wherein, if the measurement response includes a DCID, the first RRC configuration message includes a DCID. If the measurement response includes a time-frequency resource configuration of the DCID and the uplink reference signal, the first RRC configuration message includes a DCDR and a time-frequency resource configuration of the uplink reference signal.
可选地,eNB 20可以通过隧道方式,将该第一RRC配置消息发送至UE 10。Optionally, the eNB 20 may send the first RRC configuration message to the UE 10 in a tunnel manner.
可选地,如果测量响应不包括上行参考信号的时频资源配置,则在S108之后,eNB 20可以配置UE发送上行参考信号的时频资源,并将该上行参考信号的时频资源配置发送至NR控制器30和UE 10。Optionally, if the measurement response does not include the time-frequency resource configuration of the uplink reference signal, after S108, the eNB 20 may configure the UE to send the time-frequency resource of the uplink reference signal, and send the time-frequency resource configuration of the uplink reference signal to NR controller 30 and UE 10.
作为一例,在S108之后,eNB 20确定上行参考信号的时频资源配置,并通过测量配置指示信息将该上行参考信号的时频资源配置发送至NR控制器30。在此之后,NR控制器30再执行S110。且在S112中,第一RRC配置消息包括DCID和上行参考信号的时频资源配置。As an example, after S108, the eNB 20 determines the time-frequency resource configuration of the uplink reference signal, and transmits the time-frequency resource configuration of the uplink reference signal to the NR controller 30 by measuring the configuration indication information. After that, the NR controller 30 performs S110 again. And in S112, the first RRC configuration message includes a time-frequency resource configuration of the DCID and the uplink reference signal.
作为另一例,S112中的第一RRC配置消息包括DCID。在S108之后(也可以在S112之后),eNB 20确定上行参考信号的时频资源配置,并通过测量配置指示信息将该上行参考信号的时频资源配置发送至NR控制器30。在此之后,NR控制器30再执行S110。且在S112之后,eNB 20可以向UE 10发送第二RRC配置消息,该第二RRC配置消息包括上行参考信号的时频资源配置。 As another example, the first RRC configuration message in S112 includes a DCID. After S108 (may also be after S112), the eNB 20 determines the time-frequency resource configuration of the uplink reference signal, and transmits the time-frequency resource configuration of the uplink reference signal to the NR controller 30 by measuring the configuration indication information. After that, the NR controller 30 performs S110 again. And after S112, the eNB 20 may send a second RRC configuration message to the UE 10, where the second RRC configuration message includes a time-frequency resource configuration of the uplink reference signal.
可见,eNB 20可以在一个RRC配置消息中将DCID和上行参考信号的时频资源配置发送至UE 10;或者,eNB 20可以在两个不同的RRC配置消息中分别将DCID和上行参考信号的时频资源配置发送至UE 10。It can be seen that the eNB 20 can send the time-frequency resource configuration of the DCID and the uplink reference signal to the UE 10 in one RRC configuration message; or the eNB 20 can respectively set the DCID and the uplink reference signal in two different RRC configuration messages. The frequency resource configuration is sent to the UE 10.
S114,UE 10发送上行参考信号。S114. The UE 10 sends an uplink reference signal.
需要说明的是,本申请实施例对UE发送的供网络测量的信号的名称、种类、形式不作具体限定,这里均以UE发送上行参考信号为例,但本申请实施例不限于此,例如,可以是新引入的用于跟踪UE位置的跟踪信号,也可以沿用探测参考信号(Sounding Reference Signal,SRS)。It should be noted that, in this embodiment of the present application, the name, the type, and the format of the signal for the network measurement sent by the UE are not specifically limited. For example, the UE sends the uplink reference signal as an example, but the embodiment of the present application is not limited thereto, for example, It may be a newly introduced tracking signal for tracking the location of the UE, or may use a Sounding Reference Signal (SRS).
具体地,UE根据DCID和上行参考信号的时频资源配置,发送上行参考信号。Specifically, the UE sends an uplink reference signal according to the DCID and the time-frequency resource configuration of the uplink reference signal.
可选地,UE 10可以根据上行参考信号的时频资源配置,通过该时频资源发送该上行参考信号。Optionally, the UE 10 may send the uplink reference signal by using the time-frequency resource according to the time-frequency resource configuration of the uplink reference signal.
在一个实施例中,上述上行参考信号可以是SRS。在一个实施例中,该上行参考信号可以周期发送。In an embodiment, the uplink reference signal may be an SRS. In one embodiment, the uplink reference signal can be transmitted periodically.
这样,第一TPG中的TP可以根据S110中的测量指示,对UE 10发送的上行参考信号进行测量。In this way, the TP in the first TPG can measure the uplink reference signal sent by the UE 10 according to the measurement indication in S110.
S116,NR控制器30接收第一TPG中的TP 40发送的第一测量报告。S116, the NR controller 30 receives the first measurement report sent by the TP 40 in the first TPG.
本申请实施例中,第一测量报告可以包括上行参考信号的测量结果,具体的测量结果类型对应于S110中的测量配置参数。本申请实施例中以测量结果是信号强度信息为例。具体地,第一测量报告携带有TP 40检测到的UE 10所发送的上行参考信号的信号强度信息。In the embodiment of the present application, the first measurement report may include a measurement result of the uplink reference signal, and the specific measurement result type corresponds to the measurement configuration parameter in S110. In the embodiment of the present application, the measurement result is signal strength information as an example. Specifically, the first measurement report carries the signal strength information of the uplink reference signal sent by the UE 10 detected by the TP 40.
其中,第一TPG中的TP通过检测UE发送的上行参考信号,可以确定该上行参考信号的信号强度信息。The TP in the first TPG can determine the signal strength information of the uplink reference signal by detecting an uplink reference signal sent by the UE.
可理解,不同的第一测量报告中的信号强度信息可以是不相等的。例如,TP1发送的第一测量报告包括TP1检测到的上行参考信号的信号强度信息,TP2发送的第一测量报告包括TP2检测到的上行参考信号的信号强度信息。It can be understood that the signal strength information in different first measurement reports may be unequal. For example, the first measurement report sent by the TP1 includes the signal strength information of the uplink reference signal detected by the TP1, and the first measurement report sent by the TP2 includes the signal strength information of the uplink reference signal detected by the TP2.
可选地,第一TPG中的每一个TP都发送第一测量报告。Optionally, each TP in the first TPG sends a first measurement report.
可选地,第一TPG中能够检测到上行参考信号的每一个TP都发送第一测量报告。Optionally, each TP in the first TPG capable of detecting the uplink reference signal sends the first measurement report.
可选地,第一TPG中的部分TP发送第一测量报告。例如,如果第一TPG中的第一TP检测到的上行参考信号的信号强度信息大于或等于测量门限,则该第一TP发送第一测量报告。例如,如果第一TPG中的第一TP检测到的上行参考信号的信号强度信息小于测量门限,则该第一TP不发送第一测量报告。Optionally, a portion of the TPs in the first TPG sends a first measurement report. For example, if the signal strength information of the uplink reference signal detected by the first TP in the first TPG is greater than or equal to the measurement threshold, the first TP sends the first measurement report. For example, if the signal strength information of the uplink reference signal detected by the first TP in the first TPG is less than the measurement threshold, the first TP does not send the first measurement report.
其中,测量门限可以是预先定义在各个TP中的;或者,测量门限可以是由NR控制器30配置的,例如,S110中的测量指示消息可以携带该测量门限。The measurement threshold may be predefined in each TP; or the measurement threshold may be configured by the NR controller 30, for example, the measurement indication message in S110 may carry the measurement threshold.
S118,NR控制器30为UE 10分配第二TPG。S118, the NR controller 30 allocates a second TPG to the UE 10.
作为一个实施例,具体地,NR控制器30可以判断第一TPG中的TP的第一测量报告所携带的信号强度信息是否满足切换门限;如果第一TPG中的TP的第一测量报告携带的信号强度信息满足切换门限,则NR控制器30为UE 10分配所述第二TPG,第二TPG包含1个或多个TP。As an embodiment, specifically, the NR controller 30 may determine whether the signal strength information carried by the first measurement report of the TP in the first TPG satisfies a handover threshold; if the first measurement report of the TP in the first TPG is carried The signal strength information satisfies the handover threshold, and the NR controller 30 allocates the second TPG to the UE 10, and the second TPG includes one or more TPs.
应当理解,切换门限大于上述的测量门限。本申请实施例中,满足切换门限可以是指 大于或等于切换门限。It should be understood that the switching threshold is greater than the measurement threshold described above. In the embodiment of the present application, the meeting the switching threshold may refer to Greater than or equal to the switching threshold.
举例来说,如果第一TPG中的某TP(如第一TP)的第一测量报告所携带的信号强度信息大于或等于切换门限,则将该TP(如第一TP)添加至第二TPG中。如果第一TPG中的某TP(如第二TP)的第一测量报告所携带的信号强度信息小于切换门限,则不将该TP(如第二TP)添加至第二TPG中。For example, if the signal strength information carried by the first measurement report of a TP (such as the first TP) in the first TPG is greater than or equal to the handover threshold, the TP (such as the first TP) is added to the second TPG. in. If the signal strength information carried by the first measurement report of a TP (eg, the second TP) in the first TPG is less than the handover threshold, the TP (eg, the second TP) is not added to the second TPG.
据此,NR控制器30可以根据切换门限,从第一TPG中选择至少一个TP作为第二TPG。Accordingly, the NR controller 30 can select at least one TP as the second TPG from the first TPG according to the handover threshold.
可选地,作为一种实现方式,NR控制器30可以从第一TPG之外TP中进行选择。也就是说,第二TPG中的TP可以全部属于第一TPG,或者,第二TPG中的TP部分属于第一TPG,另外部分不属于第一TPG,或者,第二TPG中的TP全部不属于第一TPG。Alternatively, as an implementation, the NR controller 30 may select from among the TPs other than the first TPG. That is, the TPs in the second TPG may all belong to the first TPG, or the TP part in the second TPG belongs to the first TPG, and the other part does not belong to the first TPG, or the TPs in the second TPG do not belong to the first TPG. First TPG.
其中,切换门限可以是预先配置在该NR控制器30上的。或者,切换门限可以是NR控制器30从LTE的基站eNB 20接收的,例如,S106中的测量请求包括该切换门限。The switching threshold may be pre-configured on the NR controller 30. Alternatively, the handover threshold may be received by the NR controller 30 from the base station eNB 20 of the LTE, for example, the measurement request in S106 includes the handover threshold.
作为另一个实施例,具体地,NR控制器30可以判断在预设时长内的第一TPG中的TP的第一测量报告所携带的信号强度信息是否满足切换门限;如果在预设时长内,第一TPG中的TP的所有的第一测量报告携带的信号强度信息满足切换门限,则NR控制器30为UE 10分配所述第二TPG。As another embodiment, specifically, the NR controller 30 may determine whether the signal strength information carried by the first measurement report of the TP in the first TPG within the preset time period satisfies a handover threshold; if within a preset duration, The signal strength information carried by all the first measurement reports of the TP in the first TPG satisfies the handover threshold, and the NR controller 30 allocates the second TPG to the UE 10.
应当理解,切换门限大于上述的测量门限。It should be understood that the switching threshold is greater than the measurement threshold described above.
据此,NR控制器30可以根据预设时长和切换门限,从第一TPG中选择至少一个TP作为第二TPG。Accordingly, the NR controller 30 can select at least one TP as the second TPG from the first TPG according to the preset duration and the handover threshold.
其中,预设时长可以通过定时器的方式实现,NR控制器30可以在定时器运行时间内,判断信号强度信息是否满足切换门限。The preset duration can be implemented by using a timer. The NR controller 30 can determine whether the signal strength information meets the switching threshold during the running time of the timer.
可选地,作为一种实现方式,NR控制器30也可以从第一TPG之外的其他TP中进行选择,作为第二TPG中的部分TP。也就是说,第二TPG中的全部或部分TP属于第一TPG,或者,第二TPG中的TP全部不属于第一TPG。Alternatively, as an implementation manner, the NR controller 30 may also select from other TPs other than the first TPG as part of the TP in the second TPG. That is to say, all or part of the TPs in the second TPG belong to the first TPG, or all of the TPs in the second TPG do not belong to the first TPG.
其中,预设时长可以是预先配置在该NR控制器30上的。或者,预设时长可以是NR控制器30从LTE的基站eNB 20接收的,例如,S106中的测量请求包括该预设时长。The preset duration may be pre-configured on the NR controller 30. Alternatively, the preset duration may be received by the NR controller 30 from the base station eNB 20 of the LTE. For example, the measurement request in S106 includes the preset duration.
可理解,若该预设时长通过定时器的方式实现,那么,eNB 20可以在S118之前为NR控制器30配置该定时器。例如,在S106中,测量请求包括定时器的指示信息,该指示信息包括定时器的时长(即预设时长)。It can be understood that if the preset duration is implemented by means of a timer, the eNB 20 can configure the timer for the NR controller 30 before S118. For example, in S106, the measurement request includes indication information of a timer, where the indication information includes a duration of the timer (ie, a preset duration).
S120,NR控制器30向eNB 20发送切换指示消息。S120. The NR controller 30 sends a handover indication message to the eNB 20.
可选地,该切换指示消息可以包括第二TPG的指示信息,以使得UE 10与第二TPG中的TP进行数据传输。Optionally, the handover indication message may include indication information of the second TPG to enable data transmission between the UE 10 and the TP in the second TPG.
可选地,该切换指示消息还可以进一步包括:NR控制器30为UE 10配置的传输资源信息,和/或,NR控制器30为UE 10分配的新的ID。Optionally, the handover indication message may further include: transmission resource information configured by the NR controller 30 for the UE 10, and/or a new ID allocated by the NR controller 30 to the UE 10.
可选地,该切换指示消息还可以进一步包括层一(L1)和/或层二(L2)和/或层三(L3)的配置等,本申请对此不限定。Optionally, the handover indication message may further include a configuration of layer one (L1) and/or layer two (L2) and/or layer three (L3), etc., which is not limited in this application.
这样,在S120之后,eNB 20可以根据切换指示消息,判断是否准许UE 10进行切换。也就是说,eNB 20决定是否把NR作为UE 10的服务小区。Thus, after S120, the eNB 20 can determine whether to permit the UE 10 to perform handover according to the handover indication message. That is, the eNB 20 decides whether or not to use the NR as the serving cell of the UE 10.
可选地,eNB 20在接收到切换指示消息后,可以直接同意将NR作为UE 10的服务 小区。或者,eNB 20在接收到切换指示消息后,可以进行一定的判断后,再决定是否同意将NR作为UE 10的服务小区。例如,若eNB 20与UE 10之间的信号质量大于或等于某质量门限,且eNB 20当前的负载小于某负载门限,eNB 20可以决定拒绝将NR作为UE 10的服务小区。例如,若eNB 20与UE 10之间的信号质量小于某质量门限,或eNB 20当前的负载大于或等于某负载门限,eNB 20可以决定将NR作为UE 10的服务小区。Optionally, after receiving the handover indication message, the eNB 20 may directly agree to use the NR as the service of the UE 10. Community. Alternatively, after receiving the handover indication message, the eNB 20 may perform a certain determination and then decide whether to agree to use the NR as the serving cell of the UE 10. For example, if the signal quality between the eNB 20 and the UE 10 is greater than or equal to a certain quality threshold, and the current load of the eNB 20 is less than a certain load threshold, the eNB 20 may decide to reject the NR as the serving cell of the UE 10. For example, if the signal quality between the eNB 20 and the UE 10 is less than a certain quality threshold, or the current load of the eNB 20 is greater than or equal to a certain load threshold, the eNB 20 may decide to use the NR as the serving cell of the UE 10.
S122,eNB 20向UE 10发送切换命令。S122. The eNB 20 sends a handover command to the UE 10.
可选地,eNB 20在接收到NR控制器30的切换指示消息后,如果决定将NR作为UE10的服务小区,则可以执行S122。Alternatively, after receiving the handover indication message of the NR controller 30, the eNB 20 may perform S122 if it decides to use the NR as the serving cell of the UE 10.
其中,该切换命令可以包括NR控制器30为UE 10所分配的第二TPG的指示信息。The handover command may include indication information of the second TPG allocated by the NR controller 30 for the UE 10.
S124,UE 10与第二TPG中的TP进行数据传输。S124. The UE 10 performs data transmission with the TP in the second TPG.
具体地,UE 10可以根据切换命令,将hyper cell作为服务小区或者将hyper cell作为其中的一个服务小区,并与其中第二TPG中的TP进行通信。Specifically, the UE 10 may use the hyper cell as the serving cell or the hyper cell as one of the serving cells according to the handover command, and communicate with the TP in the second TPG.
如果S120中的切换指示消息包括:NR控制器30为UE 10配置的传输资源信息,相应地,S122中的切换命令也包括该传输资源信息,则在S124中,UE 10根据该传输资源信息,与第二TPG中的TP进行数据传输。If the handover indication message in S120 includes: the transmission resource information configured by the NR controller 30 for the UE 10, and correspondingly, the handover command in the S122 also includes the transmission resource information, then in S124, the UE 10 according to the transmission resource information, Data transmission with the TP in the second TPG.
如果S120中的切换指示消息包括:NR控制器30为UE 10分配的新的ID(如new DCID),相应地,S122中的切换命令也包括该新的ID,则在S124中,UE 10使用该新的ID,与第二TPG中的TP进行数据传输。If the handover indication message in S120 includes: a new ID (such as new DCID) allocated by the NR controller 30 to the UE 10, correspondingly, the handover command in S122 also includes the new ID, then in S124, the UE 10 uses The new ID is transmitted with the TP in the second TPG.
如果S120中的切换指示消息不包括上述的传输资源信息和新的ID,则在S124中,UE 10重用之前的NR配置,与第二TPG中的TP进行数据传输。If the handover indication message in S120 does not include the above-mentioned transmission resource information and the new ID, then in S124, the UE 10 reuses the previous NR configuration and performs data transmission with the TP in the second TPG.
举例来说,在S124中,UE 10可以根据NR配置,向第二TPG中的TP发送SRS,并与第二TPG中的TP建立数据传输。For example, in S124, the UE 10 may send an SRS to the TP in the second TPG according to the NR configuration, and establish a data transmission with the TP in the second TPG.
这样,本申请实施例,能够实现从以网络为中心的LTE***,到以用户为中心的NR***之间的切换,保证了业务的连续性,提高了切换的效率,从而能够保证传输质量。In this way, the embodiment of the present application can implement switching between the network-centric LTE system and the user-centered NR system, ensuring continuity of services, improving handover efficiency, and thus ensuring transmission quality.
结合图3所示的实施例,在S114中UE 10发送上行参考信号之前,可以完成UE 10与NR控制器30的上行同步。In conjunction with the embodiment shown in FIG. 3, uplink synchronization of the UE 10 and the NR controller 30 may be completed before the UE 10 transmits the uplink reference signal in S114.
作为上行同步的一种实现方式,如图4所示,可以包括:As an implementation manner of the uplink synchronization, as shown in FIG. 4, the method may include:
S111,eNB 20确定UE 10与NR控制器30间的TA。S111, the eNB 20 determines the TA between the UE 10 and the NR controller 30.
可选地,eNB 20可以根据eNB 20与UE 10之间的第一TA值以及eNB 20与NR控制器30之间的第二TA值,确定UE 10与NR控制器30之间的第三TA值。Alternatively, the eNB 20 may determine the third TA between the UE 10 and the NR controller 30 according to the first TA value between the eNB 20 and the UE 10 and the second TA value between the eNB 20 and the NR controller 30. value.
随后,eNB 20可将该确定的第三TA值发送至UE 10。The eNB 20 may then transmit the determined third TA value to the UE 10.
可选地,作为一例,如图4所示,S112中的第一RRC配置消息包括DCID、上行参考信号的时频资源配置以及第三TA。Optionally, as an example, as shown in FIG. 4, the first RRC configuration message in S112 includes a DCID, a time-frequency resource configuration of an uplink reference signal, and a third TA.
可选地,作为另一例,还包括:eNB 20向UE 10发送第二RRC配置消息。其中,第一RRC配置消息包括DCID,第二RRC配置消息包括上行参考信号的时频资源配置以及第三TA。或者,第一RRC配置消息包括DCID以及上行参考信号的时频资源配置,第二RRC配置消息包括第三TA。此时,S112可以在S111之前或之后执行,本申请对此不限定。Optionally, as another example, the method further includes: the eNB 20 sends a second RRC configuration message to the UE 10. The first RRC configuration message includes a DCID, and the second RRC configuration message includes a time-frequency resource configuration of the uplink reference signal and a third TA. Alternatively, the first RRC configuration message includes a DCID and a time-frequency resource configuration of the uplink reference signal, and the second RRC configuration message includes a third TA. At this time, S112 may be performed before or after S111, which is not limited in this application.
可选地,作为另一例,还包括:eNB 20向UE 10发送第二RRC配置消息。其中,第 一RRC配置消息包括DCID以及第三TA,第二RRC配置消息包括上行参考信号的时频资源配置。此时,发送第二RRC配置消息可以在S111之前或之后执行,本申请对此不限定。Optionally, as another example, the method further includes: the eNB 20 sends a second RRC configuration message to the UE 10. Among them, the first An RRC configuration message includes a DCID and a third TA, and the second RRC configuration message includes a time-frequency resource configuration of the uplink reference signal. At this time, the sending of the second RRC configuration message may be performed before or after S111, which is not limited in this application.
可理解,图4的实施例中,可以结合图3中S112的相关描述,为避免重复,这里不再赘述。It can be understood that, in the embodiment of FIG. 4, the related description of S112 in FIG. 3 may be combined, and in order to avoid repetition, details are not described herein again.
这样,在图4所示的实施例中,由eNB 20快速地确定UE 10与NR控制器30之间的TA值,能够保证切换的效率。Thus, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 4, the TA value between the UE 10 and the NR controller 30 is quickly determined by the eNB 20, and the efficiency of handover can be ensured.
作为上行同步的另一种实现方式,如图5所示,可以包括:As another implementation manner of the uplink synchronization, as shown in FIG. 5, the method may include:
S108中的测量响应还可以进一步包括TA测试指令,以便于eNB 20指示UE 10发送TA测试消息。也就是说,S108中的测量响应包括DCID和TA测试指令。或者,S108中的测量响应包括DCID、上行参考信号的时频资源配置和TA测试指令。The measurement response in S108 may further include a TA test command to facilitate the eNB 20 to instruct the UE 10 to transmit a TA test message. That is, the measurement response in S108 includes a DCID and a TA test command. Alternatively, the measurement response in S108 includes a DCID, a time-frequency resource configuration of the uplink reference signal, and a TA test command.
相应地,S112中的第一RRC配置消息还可以进一步包括该TA测试指令。也就是说,S112中的第一RRC配置消息可以包括DCID和TA测试指令。或者,S112中的第一RRC配置消息可以包括DCID、上行参考信号的时频资源配置和TA测试指令。TA测试指令可以包括配置给UE的随机接入前导序列preamble index,发送preamble index的时频资源信息(比如PRACH Mask Index)等。Correspondingly, the first RRC configuration message in S112 may further include the TA test instruction. That is, the first RRC configuration message in S112 may include a DCID and a TA test instruction. Alternatively, the first RRC configuration message in S112 may include a DCID, a time-frequency resource configuration of the uplink reference signal, and a TA test instruction. The TA test command may include a random access preamble sequence preamble index configured for the UE, a time-frequency resource information (such as a PRACH Mask Index) for transmitting a preamble index, and the like.
S1131,UE 10发送TA测试消息。S1131. The UE 10 sends a TA test message.
具体地,UE 10可以根据TA测试指令,向NR控制器30发送该TA测试消息。这里,TA测试消息也可以称为上行TA估计信号或者上行TA测试信号等,本申请对此不限定。Specifically, the UE 10 may send the TA test message to the NR controller 30 according to the TA test command. Here, the TA test message may also be referred to as an uplink TA estimation signal or an uplink TA test signal, etc., which is not limited in this application.
S1131还可以包括:UE 10可以根据NR控制器广播的随机接入资源配置,随机选择一个随机接入前导序列preamble index和随机接入时频资源,向NR控制器30发送该TA测试消息。The S1131 may further include: the UE 10 may randomly select a random access preamble sequence preamble index and a random access time-frequency resource according to the random access resource configuration broadcast by the NR controller, and send the TA test message to the NR controller 30.
S1132,NR控制器30向eNB 20发送TA值。S1132, the NR controller 30 transmits the TA value to the eNB 20.
NR控制器30可以根据接收到的TA测试消息,经过计算得到该TA值。The NR controller 30 can calculate the TA value based on the received TA test message.
可选地,S1132中,NR控制器30可以向eNB 20发送一个测量配置响应消息,该测量配置响应消息携带该TA值。Optionally, in S1132, the NR controller 30 may send a measurement configuration response message to the eNB 20, where the measurement configuration response message carries the TA value.
S1133,eNB 20将该TA值发送值UE 10。S1133, the eNB 20 transmits the TA value to the UE 10.
可选地,S1133中,eNB 20可以向UE 10发送第二RRC配置消息,该第二RRC配置消息承载该TA值。Optionally, in S1133, the eNB 20 may send a second RRC configuration message to the UE 10, where the second RRC configuration message carries the TA value.
可选地,作为一个实施例,在S1131之后,NR控制器30可以将TA值直接发送至UE 10。也就是说,S1132和S1133可以替换为如下步骤:NR控制器30将TA值发送至UE 10。Alternatively, as an embodiment, after S1131, the NR controller 30 may send the TA value directly to the UE 10. That is, S1132 and S1133 may be replaced with the following steps: The NR controller 30 transmits the TA value to the UE 10.
作为上行同步的另一种实现方式,NR控制器30可以先给UE 10配置专用前导(preamble)以获得TA,如图6所示,包括:As another implementation manner of uplink synchronization, the NR controller 30 may first configure a dedicated preamble for the UE 10 to obtain a TA, as shown in FIG. 6, including:
S1071,NR控制器30向UE 10发送专用前导配置。S1071, the NR controller 30 transmits a dedicated preamble configuration to the UE 10.
具体地,NR控制器30可以给UE 10配置随机接入前导序列preamble index,和发送preamble index的时频资源信息。Specifically, the NR controller 30 may configure the UE 10 with a random access preamble sequence preamble index and transmit time-frequency resource information of the preamble index.
S1072,UE 10向NR控制器30发送TA测试消息。S1072, the UE 10 transmits a TA test message to the NR controller 30.
这里,TA测试消息也可以称为上行TA估计信号或者上行TA测试信号等,本申请 对此不限定。Here, the TA test message may also be referred to as an uplink TA estimation signal or an uplink TA test signal, etc., this application This is not limited.
具体地,UE 20可以根据专用前导配置直接接入NR控制器30,而无需发起NAS和S1-like接口建立过程,不进行数据传输,这样,能够提高切换的效率。Specifically, the UE 20 can directly access the NR controller 30 according to the dedicated preamble configuration without starting the NAS and S1-like interface establishment process, and does not perform data transmission, so that the handover efficiency can be improved.
进一步地,在S108中的测量响应包括DCID、上行参考信号的时频资源配置和TA值。Further, the measurement response in S108 includes a DCID, a time-frequency resource configuration of the uplink reference signal, and a TA value.
可理解,NR控制器30可以先给UE 10配置专用前导以获得TA值,然后再配置DCID和上行参考信号的时频资源。It can be understood that the NR controller 30 can first configure the UE 10 with a dedicated preamble to obtain the TA value, and then configure the DCID and the time-frequency resources of the uplink reference signal.
相应地,在S112中的第一RRC配置消息也包括DCID、上行参考信号的时频资源配置和TA值。Correspondingly, the first RRC configuration message in S112 also includes a DCID, a time-frequency resource configuration of the uplink reference signal, and a TA value.
这样,在图5或图6所示的实施例中,由NR控制器30基于UE 10发送的TA测试消息确定UE 10与NR控制器30之间的TA值,能够保证TA值的准确性,从而保证切换的质量。Thus, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 5 or FIG. 6, the TA value between the UE 10 and the NR controller 30 is determined by the NR controller 30 based on the TA test message transmitted by the UE 10, and the accuracy of the TA value can be ensured. Thereby ensuring the quality of the handover.
可选地,作为另一个实施例,UE 10执行切换的切换判决也可以由eNB 20执行,如图7所示。图7所示的S1171之前可以执行S102至S116中的部分或全部步骤,且步骤S102至S116可以参见前述图3至图6所示的任一实施例,为避免重复,这里不再赘述。Optionally, as another embodiment, the handover decision of the UE 10 to perform handover may also be performed by the eNB 20, as shown in FIG. Some or all of the steps S102 to S116 may be performed before S1171 shown in FIG. 7, and steps S102 to S116 may be referred to any of the foregoing embodiments shown in FIG. 3 to FIG. 6. To avoid repetition, details are not described herein again.
S1171,NR控制器30向eNB 20发送测量指示信息。S1171, the NR controller 30 transmits measurement indication information to the eNB 20.
可选地,NR控制器30可以判断第一TPG中的TP的第一测量报告所携带的信号强度信息是否满足切换门限;如果第一TPG中的TP的第一测量报告携带的信号强度信息满足切换门限,则NR控制器30执行S1171。其中,切换门限可以是预先配置在该NR控制器30上的。或者,切换门限可以是NR控制器30从LTE的基站eNB 20接收的,例如,S106中的测量请求包括该切换门限。Optionally, the NR controller 30 may determine whether the signal strength information carried by the first measurement report of the TP in the first TPG meets a handover threshold; if the signal strength information carried by the first measurement report of the TP in the first TPG is satisfied When the threshold is switched, the NR controller 30 executes S1171. The switching threshold may be pre-configured on the NR controller 30. Alternatively, the handover threshold may be received by the NR controller 30 from the base station eNB 20 of the LTE, for example, the measurement request in S106 includes the handover threshold.
可选地,NR控制器30可以判断在预设时长内的第一TPG中的TP的第一测量报告所携带的信号强度信息是否满足切换门限;如果在预设时长内,第一TPG中的TP的第一测量报告携带的信号强度信息满足切换门限,则NR控制器30执行S1171。其中,切换门限和预设时长可以是预先配置在该NR控制器30上的。或者,切换门限和预设时长可以是NR控制器30从LTE的基站eNB 20接收的,例如,S106中的测量请求包括该切换门限和预设时长。Optionally, the NR controller 30 may determine whether the signal strength information carried by the first measurement report of the TP in the first TPG in the preset time period satisfies a handover threshold; if within a preset duration, in the first TPG The signal strength information carried by the first measurement report of the TP satisfies the switching threshold, and the NR controller 30 executes S1171. The switching threshold and the preset duration may be pre-configured on the NR controller 30. Alternatively, the handover threshold and the preset duration may be received by the NR controller 30 from the base station eNB 20 of the LTE. For example, the measurement request in S106 includes the handover threshold and the preset duration.
该测量指示信息可以包括第一TPG中的TP的第一测量报告。或者,该测量指示信息可以包括满足切换质量要求的指示信息,例如为TURE或1。The measurement indication information may include a first measurement report of the TP in the first TPG. Alternatively, the measurement indication information may include indication information that satisfies the handover quality requirement, such as TURE or 1.
S1172,eNB 20执行切换判决。S1172, the eNB 20 performs a handover decision.
具体地,eNB 20决定是否将NR作为UE 10的一个服务小区。可选地,eNB 20在接收到测量指示信息后,可以直接同意将NR作为UE 10的服务小区。或者,eNB 20在接收到测量指示信息后,可以进行一定的判断后,再决定是否同意将NR作为UE 10的服务小区。例如,若eNB 20与UE 10之间的信号质量大于或等于某质量门限,且eNB 20当前的负载小于某负载门限,eNB 20可以决定拒绝将NR作为UE 10的服务小区。例如,若eNB 20与UE 10之间的信号质量小于某质量门限,或eNB 20当前的负载大于或等于某负载门限,eNB 20可以决定将NR作为UE 10的服务小区。Specifically, the eNB 20 decides whether or not to use the NR as one serving cell of the UE 10. Optionally, after receiving the measurement indication information, the eNB 20 may directly agree to use the NR as the serving cell of the UE 10. Alternatively, after receiving the measurement indication information, the eNB 20 may perform a certain determination before deciding whether to agree to use the NR as the serving cell of the UE 10. For example, if the signal quality between the eNB 20 and the UE 10 is greater than or equal to a certain quality threshold, and the current load of the eNB 20 is less than a certain load threshold, the eNB 20 may decide to reject the NR as the serving cell of the UE 10. For example, if the signal quality between the eNB 20 and the UE 10 is less than a certain quality threshold, or the current load of the eNB 20 is greater than or equal to a certain load threshold, the eNB 20 may decide to use the NR as the serving cell of the UE 10.
若eNB 20决定将NR作为UE 10的服务小区,则可以执行S1173。If the eNB 20 decides to use the NR as the serving cell of the UE 10, S1173 may be performed.
S1173,eNB 20向NR控制器30发送切换请求。S1173, the eNB 20 transmits a handover request to the NR controller 30.
S118,NR控制器30为UE 10分配第二TPG。 S118, the NR controller 30 allocates a second TPG to the UE 10.
具体地,NR控制器30可以在接收到切换请求后,将满足切换门限的第一TPG中的TP的全部或部分作为第二TPG。Specifically, the NR controller 30 may, after receiving the handover request, use all or part of the TP in the first TPG that meets the handover threshold as the second TPG.
可选地,NR控制器30还可以为UE 10配置新的ID(例如new DCID)和/或传输资源等。Alternatively, the NR controller 30 may also configure the UE 10 with a new ID (eg, new DCID) and/or transmission resources, and the like.
S1174,NR控制器30向eNB 20发送切换响应。S1174, the NR controller 30 transmits a handover response to the eNB 20.
该切换响应可以包括第二TPG的指示信息。可选地,该切换响应还可以进一步包括NR控制器30为UE 10配置的传输资源信息,和/或,NR控制器30为UE 10分配的新的ID。The handover response may include indication information of the second TPG. Optionally, the handover response may further include transmission resource information configured by the NR controller 30 for the UE 10, and/or a new ID assigned by the NR controller 30 to the UE 10.
可选地,该切换响应还可以进一步包括层一(L1)和/或层二(L2)和/或层三(L3)的配置等,本申请对此不限定。Optionally, the switching response may further include the configuration of layer one (L1) and/or layer two (L2) and/or layer three (L3), etc., which is not limited in this application.
进一步地,S122和S124可以参见前述图3的实施例中的相关描述,为避免重复,这里不再赘述。Further, S122 and S124 can refer to the related description in the foregoing embodiment of FIG. 3. To avoid repetition, details are not described herein again.
可见,本申请实施例中,通过UE执行异***检测,可以基于该检测完成从LTE***至NR***的切换,能够保证UE在LTE***和NR***之间的连续移动性,保证切换的效率。It can be seen that, in the embodiment of the present application, the UE performs the heterogeneous system detection, and the handover from the LTE system to the NR system can be completed based on the detection, and the continuous mobility between the LTE system and the NR system can be ensured, and the handover efficiency is ensured.
图8是本申请实施例的UE从NR移动至LTE的切换的一个示意性流程图。应理解,图8示出了应用于从NR切换到LTE的详细的通信步骤或操作,但这些步骤或操作仅是示例,本申请实施例还可以执行其它操作或者图8中的各种操作的变形。此外,图8中的各个步骤可以按照与图8呈现的不同的顺序来执行,并且有可能并非要执行图8中的全部操作。图8中示出了UE 10、NR控制器30和eNB 20。图8所示的方法可以包括:FIG. 8 is a schematic flowchart of a handover of a UE from NR to LTE according to an embodiment of the present application. It should be understood that FIG. 8 illustrates detailed communication steps or operations applied to switch from NR to LTE, but these steps or operations are merely examples, and other embodiments of the present application may perform other operations or various operations in FIG. Deformation. Moreover, the various steps in FIG. 8 may be performed in a different order than that presented in FIG. 8, and it is possible that not all operations in FIG. 8 are to be performed. The UE 10, the NR controller 30, and the eNB 20 are shown in FIG. The method shown in Figure 8 can include:
S202,NR控制器30向UE 10发送测量配置。S202. The NR controller 30 sends a measurement configuration to the UE 10.
本申请实施例中,UE 10初始处于hyper cell的服务范围内。UE 10处于hyper cell时,会周期性地或不间断地发送上行参考信号,这样,NR控制器30可以根据TP检测到的上行参考信号的第一测量报告确定UE 10的位置。In the embodiment of the present application, the UE 10 is initially in the service range of the hyper cell. When the UE 10 is in the hyper cell, the uplink reference signal is periodically or uninterrupted, so that the NR controller 30 can determine the location of the UE 10 according to the first measurement report of the uplink reference signal detected by the TP.
举例来说,NR控制器30接收到至少一个TP中的每个TP发送的第一测量报告,且该至少一个TP位于hyper cell的边缘,则NR控制器30可以确定UE 10也处于hyper cell的边缘。进而NR控制器30可以执行S202。For example, the NR controller 30 receives the first measurement report sent by each TP in the at least one TP, and the at least one TP is located at the edge of the hyper cell, and the NR controller 30 may determine that the UE 10 is also in the hyper cell. edge. Further, the NR controller 30 can execute S202.
具体地,S202中的测量配置用于指示该UE 10进行下行测量。或者,S202中的测量配置用于指示该UE 10周期性地进行下行测量,其中,该测量配置可以携带该周期。Specifically, the measurement configuration in S202 is used to instruct the UE 10 to perform downlink measurement. Alternatively, the measurement configuration in S202 is used to indicate that the UE 10 periodically performs downlink measurement, where the measurement configuration may carry the cycle.
S204,eNB 20发送下行参考信号。S204. The eNB 20 transmits a downlink reference signal.
一般地,LTE中的基站(即eNB 20)周期性地发送下行参考信号。需要说明的是,本申请实施例对eNB 20发送的供用户测量的信号的名称、种类、形式不作具体限定,这里均以eNB 20发送下行参考信号为例,但本申请实施例不限于此,例如,可以是下行同步信号。In general, a base station (i.e., eNB 20) in LTE periodically transmits a downlink reference signal. It should be noted that, the embodiment of the present application does not specifically limit the name, the type, and the format of the signal that is sent by the eNB 20 for the user to measure. The eNB 20 sends the downlink reference signal as an example, but the embodiment of the present application is not limited thereto. For example, it can be a downlink synchronization signal.
S206,UE 10进行下行测量。S206. The UE 10 performs downlink measurement.
UE 10可以根据S202中的测量配置执行下行测量,从而检测到eNB 20发送的下行参考信号。The UE 10 may perform downlink measurement according to the measurement configuration in S202, thereby detecting the downlink reference signal transmitted by the eNB 20.
在S206中,UE 10可以根据检测到的下行参考信号,确定其信号质量,并且可以获取eNB 20的ID。 In S206, the UE 10 may determine its signal quality according to the detected downlink reference signal, and may acquire the ID of the eNB 20.
S208,UE 10向NR控制器30发送第三测量报告。S208. The UE 10 sends a third measurement report to the NR controller 30.
可选地,该第三测量报告可以包括下行参考信号的信号质量和/或LTE小区的ID。Optionally, the third measurement report may include a signal quality of the downlink reference signal and/or an ID of the LTE cell.
可选地,该第三测量报告还可以包括UE 10的ID。Optionally, the third measurement report may further include an ID of the UE 10.
S210,NR控制器30向eNB 20发送切换请求。S210, the NR controller 30 sends a handover request to the eNB 20.
可选地,第三测量报告包括下行参考信号的信号质量,且如果该信号质量大于或等于切换门限,则NR控制器30向eNB 20发送切换请求。Optionally, the third measurement report includes a signal quality of the downlink reference signal, and if the signal quality is greater than or equal to the handover threshold, the NR controller 30 transmits a handover request to the eNB 20.
可选地,该切换请求可以包括UE 10的ID。Alternatively, the handover request may include the ID of the UE 10.
S212,eNB 20向NR控制器30发送切换响应。S212. The eNB 20 sends a handover response to the NR controller 30.
S214,NR控制器30向UE 10发送切换命令。S214, the NR controller 30 sends a handover command to the UE 10.
这样,UE 10可以在接收到切换命令之后,执行与eNB 20的随机接入过程,并在此之后执行S216。In this way, the UE 10 can perform a random access procedure with the eNB 20 after receiving the handover command, and thereafter execute S216.
S216,UE 10与eNB 20进行数据传输。S216, the UE 10 performs data transmission with the eNB 20.
可见,如果NR支持UE侧的异***测量报告,则可以按照如图8所示的方式完成从NR***至LTE***的切换,且该方法能够保证UE在NR***和LTE***之间的连续移动性,保证切换的效率。It can be seen that if the NR supports the inter-system measurement report on the UE side, the handover from the NR system to the LTE system can be completed in the manner as shown in FIG. 8, and the method can ensure continuous movement of the UE between the NR system and the LTE system. Sexuality guarantees the efficiency of switching.
作为另一个实施例,如果NR不支持UE侧的异***测量流程,如图9所示,在S208之后,该方法可以包括:As another embodiment, if the NR does not support the heterogeneous system measurement process on the UE side, as shown in FIG. 9, after S208, the method may include:
S209,NR控制器30向eNB 20发送测量指示信息。S209, the NR controller 30 transmits measurement indication information to the eNB 20.
可选地,该测量指示信息可以包括下行参考信号的信号质量和/或eNB的ID。Optionally, the measurement indication information may include a signal quality of the downlink reference signal and/or an ID of the eNB.
可选地,该测量指示信息还可以包括UE 10的ID。Optionally, the measurement indication information may further include an ID of the UE 10.
这样,eNB可以判断下行参考信号的信号质量是否满足切换门限,如果满足,则执行S211。In this way, the eNB can determine whether the signal quality of the downlink reference signal satisfies the handover threshold, and if so, execute S211.
S211,eNB 20向NR控制器30发送切换指示信息。In S211, the eNB 20 transmits the handover indication information to the NR controller 30.
具体地,如果下行参考信号的信号质量大于或等于切换门限,则eNB 20向NR控制器30发送切换指示信息。Specifically, if the signal quality of the downlink reference signal is greater than or equal to the handover threshold, the eNB 20 transmits handover indication information to the NR controller 30.
可理解,如果下行参考信号的信号质量大于或等于切换门限,则eNB 20可以确定UE10已经位于该eNB 20的服务范围之内,则允许UE 10进行切换,也就是说,允许UE 10将eNB 20作为服务小区。It can be understood that if the signal quality of the downlink reference signal is greater than or equal to the handover threshold, the eNB 20 can determine that the UE 10 is already within the service range of the eNB 20, then allow the UE 10 to perform handover, that is, allow the UE 10 to use the eNB 20 As a service cell.
可理解,图9中具有同样序号的步骤可以参见前述图8的实施例中的相关描述,为避免重复,这里不再赘述。It can be understood that the steps of the same sequence number in FIG. 9 can be referred to the related description in the foregoing embodiment of FIG. 8. To avoid repetition, details are not described herein again.
可见,如果NR不支持UE侧的异***测量报告,则可以按照如图9所示的方式完成从NR***至LTE***的切换,且该方法能够保证UE在NR***和LTE***之间的连续移动性,保证切换的效率。It can be seen that if the NR does not support the inter-system measurement report on the UE side, the handover from the NR system to the LTE system can be completed in the manner as shown in FIG. 9, and the method can ensure the continuity between the UE and the LTE system. Mobility ensures the efficiency of switching.
作为另一个实施例,图10是本申请实施例的小区重选的方法的示意性流程图。包括:As another embodiment, FIG. 10 is a schematic flowchart of a method for cell reselection according to an embodiment of the present application. include:
S201,UE 10接收TP 40的指示信息。S201. The UE 10 receives the indication information of the TP 40.
UE 10在hyper cell中可以处于移动状态,当UE 10移动至hyper cell的边缘时,hyper cell最外层的TP(如TP3)可以向UE 10发送指示信息。也就是说,图10中的TP 40为hyper cell最外层的TP,例如为TP3。The UE 10 may be in a mobile state in the hyper cell. When the UE 10 moves to the edge of the hyper cell, the TP of the outermost cell of the hyper cell (such as TP3) may send indication information to the UE 10. That is, the TP 40 in FIG. 10 is the TP of the outermost layer of the hyper cell, for example, TP3.
可选地,该指示信息可以携带在***消息中,也可以携带在PSS或SSS或其它下行 公共信道中,本申请对此不限定。其中,指示信息可以是由TP 40以广播的形式发送的。Optionally, the indication information may be carried in a system message, or may be carried in a PSS or SSS or other downlink. In the common channel, this application is not limited thereto. Wherein, the indication information may be sent by the TP 40 in the form of a broadcast.
可选地,该指示信息还可以是NR控制器通过专有信令发送给UE10的。Optionally, the indication information may also be sent by the NR controller to the UE 10 by using dedicated signaling.
可理解,在S201之前,NR控制器30可以配置hyper cell的最外层TP,以使得最外层TP检测到UE 10的上行参考信号后,向UE 10发送指示信息。It can be understood that, before S201, the NR controller 30 can configure the outermost TP of the hyper cell, so that the outermost TP sends the indication information to the UE 10 after detecting the uplink reference signal of the UE 10.
可选地,若TP 40(即hyper cell最外层的TP,例如为TP3)检测到UE 10的上行参考信号,且该上行参考信号的信号强度低于某门限,则TP 40可以确定该UE 10已经到达hyper cell边缘,则TP 40可以向UE 10发送指示信息。Optionally, if the TP 40 (that is, the TP of the outermost cell of the hyper cell, for example, TP3) detects the uplink reference signal of the UE 10, and the signal strength of the uplink reference signal is lower than a certain threshold, the TP 40 may determine the UE. 10 has reached the edge of the hyper cell, and the TP 40 can send indication information to the UE 10.
S205,UE 10根据指示信息执行下行测量。S205. The UE 10 performs downlink measurement according to the indication information.
具体地,hyper cell中的UE可以处于节电态或激活态。即UE有两种状态,并且可以在这两种状态之间进行转换,如当UE数据传送完毕后一段时间没有业务数据传输,该UE可以从激活态转到节电态;在节电态,UE可以不监测动态控制信道,只需支持少量的连接管理,其耗电会比激活态少。例如,节电态的UE可以继续保留专用用户设备标识,继续发送上行参考信号,并监听寻呼消息。Specifically, the UE in the hyper cell may be in a power-saving state or an active state. That is, the UE has two states, and can switch between the two states. For example, when there is no service data transmission for a period of time after the UE data transmission is completed, the UE can be switched from the active state to the power-saving state; in the power-saving state, The UE may not monitor the dynamic control channel, and only needs to support a small amount of connection management, which consumes less power than the active state. For example, the power-saving UE may continue to reserve the dedicated user equipment identity, continue to send the uplink reference signal, and listen to the paging message.
其中,节电态的UE也可以称为空闲态的UE或称为ECO态的UE,ECO表示Ecology(生态),Conservation(节能)、Optimization(优化)。其中,激活态的UE也可以称为连接态的UE,当激活态UE一段时间没有数据传输时,激活态UE可以进入DRX。The power-saving UE may also be referred to as an idle state UE or a UE called an ECO state, and ECO means Ecology, Conservation, and Optimization. The activated state UE may also be referred to as a connected state UE. When the active state UE has no data transmission for a period of time, the active state UE may enter the DRX.
具体地,UE 10可以在满足触发条件时,执行下行测量。其中,触发条件可以是:(1),接收到TP的指示信息,(2),UE已经到达hyper cell的边缘,(3),UE处于节电态,或者处于没有业务传输的激活态,或者处于DRX的激活态,中的至少一个。Specifically, the UE 10 may perform downlink measurement when the trigger condition is met. The triggering condition may be: (1) receiving the indication information of the TP, (2) the UE has reached the edge of the hyper cell, (3), the UE is in a power-saving state, or is in an active state without service transmission, or At least one of the active states of DRX.
举例来说,如果UE 10已经到达hyper cell的边缘,并且UE 10处于节电态或者处于没有业务传输的激活态时,则UE 10可以执行下行测量。For example, if the UE 10 has reached the edge of the hyper cell and the UE 10 is in a power-saving state or in an active state with no traffic transmission, the UE 10 may perform downlink measurements.
具体地,UE 10执行下行测量是指,UE 10根据NR控制器的配置或NR控制器广播的配置测量各个相邻小区50的下行参考信号,相邻小区50可以是eNB的小区,或相邻NR hyper cell。例如UE 10检测到相邻小区50在S203发送的下行参考信号。Specifically, the UE 10 performs the downlink measurement, that is, the UE 10 measures the downlink reference signal of each neighboring cell 50 according to the configuration of the NR controller or the configuration broadcast by the NR controller, and the neighboring cell 50 may be a cell of the eNB, or adjacent. NR hyper cell. For example, the UE 10 detects the downlink reference signal transmitted by the neighboring cell 50 at S203.
S207,UE 10重选到相邻小区。S207. The UE 10 reselects to the neighboring cell.
具体地,如果UE 10检测到当前所在的hyper cell的信号质量低于第一门限,和/或,如果UE 10检测到相邻小区的下行参考信号的信号质量高于第二门限,则UE 10执行小区重选。其中,第二门限大于第一门限。Specifically, if the UE 10 detects that the signal quality of the currently located hyper cell is lower than the first threshold, and/or, if the UE 10 detects that the signal quality of the downlink reference signal of the neighboring cell is higher than the second threshold, the UE 10 Perform cell reselection. The second threshold is greater than the first threshold.
例如,UE 10在S205执行下行测量,并基于测量结果进行小区重选,可选地,UE 10可以尽量选择驻留在信号条件好的小区。For example, the UE 10 performs downlink measurement at S205 and performs cell reselection based on the measurement result. Alternatively, the UE 10 may select a cell that resides in a signal condition as much as possible.
可见,hyper cell中处于节电态或无业务激活态或DRX的激活态的UE可以执行下行测量,进而能够完成小区重选。It can be seen that the UE in the hyper cell in the power-saving state or the no-service active state or the active state of the DRX can perform downlink measurement, thereby completing cell reselection.
图11是本申请实施例的小区切换的一个示意性流程图。图11所示的方法包括:FIG. 11 is a schematic flowchart of cell handover in the embodiment of the present application. The method shown in Figure 11 includes:
S301,第一网络设备向用户设备UE当前服务小区的第二网络设备发送专用连接标识DCID,以使得所述第二网络设备将所述DCID转发至所述UE,其中,所述DCID用于所述第一网络设备标识所述UE。S301. The first network device sends a dedicated connection identifier DCID to the second network device of the current serving cell of the user equipment UE, so that the second network device forwards the DCID to the UE, where the DCID is used by the The first network device identifies the UE.
S302,所述第一网络设备向所述第二网络设备发送上行参考信号的时频资源配置,以使得所述第二网络设备将所述上行参考信号的时频资源配置转发至所述UE。S302. The first network device sends a time-frequency resource configuration of the uplink reference signal to the second network device, so that the second network device forwards the time-frequency resource configuration of the uplink reference signal to the UE.
S303,所述第一网络设备向所述第二网络设备发送切换指示消息,所述切换指示消息 包括第一网络设备所在的第一网络中的第二节点的标识,以使得所述UE与所述节点进行数据传输。S303. The first network device sends a handover indication message to the second network device, where the handover indication message is sent. An identifier of a second node in the first network in which the first network device is located is included to cause the UE to perform data transmission with the node.
可选地,本申请实施例中的第一网络设备为以用户为中心的***中的网络设备,第二网络设备为以网络为中心的***中的网络设备。例如,第一网络设备为前述实施例中的NR控制器,第二网络设备为前述实施例中的eNB,相应地,第一网络设备所在的第一网络可以为NR。本申请对此不限定。Optionally, the first network device in the embodiment of the present application is a network device in a user-centric system, and the second network device is a network device in a network-centric system. For example, the first network device is the NR controller in the foregoing embodiment, and the second network device is the eNB in the foregoing embodiment. Accordingly, the first network where the first network device is located may be the NR. This application is not limited thereto.
可选地,在S303之前,还可以包括:Optionally, before S303, the method may further include:
所述第一网络设备将测量指示消息发送给第一节点,指示所述第一节点测量所述UE发送的上行参考信号,所述测量指示消息携带所述DCID和所述上行参考信号的时频资源配置;Sending, by the first network device, a measurement indication message to the first node, instructing the first node to measure an uplink reference signal sent by the UE, where the measurement indication message carries the DCID and a time frequency of the uplink reference signal Resource allocation
所述第一网络设备接收所述第一节点发送的第一测量报告,所述第一测量报告携带所述UE发送的所述上行参考信号的测量结果;Receiving, by the first network device, a first measurement report sent by the first node, where the first measurement report carries a measurement result of the uplink reference signal sent by the UE;
所述第一网络设备根据所述第一节点的第一测量报告,为所述UE分配第二节点。The first network device allocates a second node to the UE according to the first measurement report of the first node.
从而,S303中的所述节点包括所述第二节点,也就是说,切换指示消息包括第二节点的标识,以使得UE与第二节点进行数据传输。Thus, the node in S303 includes the second node, that is, the handover indication message includes an identifier of the second node, so that the UE performs data transmission with the second node.
可选地,其中的测量指示消息还可以包括测量门限,从而使得第一节点基于测量门限进行上报。具体地,第一节点检测到上行参考信号的信号强度大于或等于该测量门限的条件下,第一节点向第一网络设备发送第一测量报告。Optionally, the measurement indication message may further include a measurement threshold, so that the first node performs reporting based on the measurement threshold. Specifically, the first node sends the first measurement report to the first network device, if the first node detects that the signal strength of the uplink reference signal is greater than or equal to the measurement threshold.
可选地,作为一个实施例,节点可以是TP,例如,第一节点为第一传输点组(Transmission Point Group,TPG)中的TP,第二节点为第二TPG中的TP。相应地,第一网络设备接收第一TPG中的TP的第一测量报告,并根据第一TPG中的TP的第一测量报告,为UE分配第二TPG。这里的第一测量报告可以是第一TPG中的TP分别发送的。Optionally, as an embodiment, the node may be a TP. For example, the first node is a TP in a first Transmission Point Group (TPG), and the second node is a TP in a second TPG. Correspondingly, the first network device receives the first measurement report of the TP in the first TPG, and allocates the second TPG to the UE according to the first measurement report of the TP in the first TPG. The first measurement report here may be sent by the TP in the first TPG separately.
可选地,作为另一个实施例,节点可以是DU和TP,相应地,第一网络设备接收DU发送的第一TPG中的TP的第一测量报告,并根据第一TPG中的TP的第一测量报告,为UE分配第二TPG。也就是说,第一TPG中的TP分别发送第一测量报告至DU,并且第一网络设备从DU接收第一TPG中的TP的第一测量报告。可以理解地,第一TPG的TP可以属于同一个或不同的DU,第二TPG的TP可以属于同一个或不同的DU。Optionally, as another embodiment, the node may be a DU and a TP, and correspondingly, the first network device receives the first measurement report of the TP in the first TPG sent by the DU, and according to the TP in the first TPG. A measurement report assigns a second TPG to the UE. That is, the TP in the first TPG separately transmits the first measurement report to the DU, and the first network device receives the first measurement report of the TP in the first TPG from the DU. It can be understood that the TPs of the first TPG may belong to the same or different DUs, and the TPs of the second TPG may belong to the same or different DUs.
其中,第一TPG可以包括一个或多个TP;第二TPG可以包括第一或多个TP。The first TPG may include one or more TPs; the second TPG may include the first or multiple TPs.
可选地,作为一个实施例,所述第一网络设备根据所述第一节点的第一测量报告,为所述UE分配第二节点,可以包括:所述第一网络设备判断所述第一节点的第一测量报告携带的所述测量结果是否满足切换门限;如果所述第一节点的第一测量报告携带的所述测量结果满足所述切换门限,则所述第一网络设备为所述UE分配所述第二节点。Optionally, as an embodiment, the first network device, according to the first measurement report of the first node, to allocate the second node to the UE, may include: the first network device determining the first Whether the measurement result carried by the first measurement report of the node meets the handover threshold; if the measurement result carried by the first measurement report of the first node meets the handover threshold, the first network device is the The UE allocates the second node.
其中,切换门限可以是预先存储或预先配置在第一网络设备中的,或者,可以是第一网络设备从第二网络设备所获取的。例如,在此之前,可以包括:第一网络设备从第二网络设备接收该切换门限。The switching threshold may be pre-stored or pre-configured in the first network device, or may be acquired by the first network device from the second network device. For example, prior to this, the first network device may receive the handover threshold from the second network device.
可选地,作为一个实施例,所述第一网络设备根据所述第一节点的第一测量报告,为所述UE分配第二节点,可以包括:所述第一网络设备判断在预设时长内的所述第一节点的第一测量报告携带的所述测量结果是否满足切换门限;如果所述第一节点的第一测量报告携带的所述测量结果满足所述切换门限,则所述第一网络设备为所述UE分配所述第二 节点。Optionally, as an embodiment, the first network device, by using the first measurement report of the first node, to allocate the second node to the UE, may include: determining, by the first network device, that the preset time is Whether the measurement result carried by the first measurement report of the first node meets a handover threshold; if the measurement result carried by the first measurement report of the first node meets the handover threshold, the a network device assigning the second to the UE node.
其中,预设时长和切换门限可以是预先存储或预先配置在第一网络设备中的,或者,可以是第一网络设备从第二网络设备所获取的。例如,在此之前,可以包括:第一网络设备从第二网络设备接收该预设时长和切换门限。The preset duration and the handover threshold may be pre-stored or pre-configured in the first network device, or may be acquired by the first network device from the second network device. For example, before this, the first network device may receive the preset duration and the switching threshold from the second network device.
本申请实施例中,S301和S302是可以同时执行的。例如,在S301之前,第一网络设备接收第二网络设备发送的测量请求。相应地,S301和S302可以包括:第一网络设备向第二网络设备发送测量响应,且该测量响应包括DCID和上行参考信号的时频资源配置。也就是说,所述DCID和所述上行参考信号的时频资源配置包括在与所述测量请求对应的测量响应。相关的描述可以参见前述实施例中的S106和S108的具体阐述,为避免重复,这里不再赘述。In the embodiment of the present application, S301 and S302 can be simultaneously executed. For example, before S301, the first network device receives the measurement request sent by the second network device. Correspondingly, S301 and S302 may include: the first network device sends a measurement response to the second network device, and the measurement response includes a DCID and a time-frequency resource configuration of the uplink reference signal. That is, the DCID and the time-frequency resource configuration of the uplink reference signal include a measurement response corresponding to the measurement request. For a description of the related description, refer to the detailed description of S106 and S108 in the foregoing embodiment. To avoid repetition, details are not described herein again.
可选地,作为一例,在S303之前,可以由第二网络设备确定第一网络设备与UE之间的TA值,相应地,可以包括:第一网络设备接收第二网络设备发送的TA值。Optionally, as an example, before the S303, the second network device may determine the TA value between the first network device and the UE, and correspondingly, the first network device may receive the TA value sent by the second network device.
可选地,作为一例,在S303之前,可以由第一网络设备确定其与UE之间的TA值,相应地,可以包括:第一网络设备向所述第二网络设备发送TA测试指令,以便于第二网络设备指示UE发送TA测试消息;第一网络设备接收所述UE发送的TA测试消息;第一网络设备根据该TA测试消息,确定TA值;第一网络设备将该TA值发送至UE。Optionally, as an example, before the S303, the first network device may determine the TA value between the UE and the UE, and correspondingly, the first network device sends the TA test command to the second network device, so that The second network device instructs the UE to send a TA test message; the first network device receives the TA test message sent by the UE; the first network device determines the TA value according to the TA test message; the first network device sends the TA value to UE.
其中,第一网络设备可以将该TA值之间发送至UE。或者,第一网络设备可以将该TA值发送至第二网络设备,并由第二网络设备将该TA值转发至UE。The first network device may send the TA value to the UE. Alternatively, the first network device may send the TA value to the second network device, and the second network device forwards the TA value to the UE.
本申请实施例中,S303可以参见前述实施例中S120的相关阐述,例如,该切换指示消息还可以包括:所述第一网络设备为所述UE配置的传输资源信息,和/或,所述第一网络设备为所述UE分配的新的ID等。为避免重复,这里不再赘述。In the embodiment of the present application, the S303 may refer to the related description of the S120 in the foregoing embodiment. For example, the handover indication message may further include: the transmission resource information configured by the first network device for the UE, and/or the A new ID or the like assigned by the first network device to the UE. To avoid repetition, we will not repeat them here.
可见,本申请实施例中的第一网络设备可以向第二网络设备发送DCID和上行参考信号的时频资源配置,从而可以通过第二网络设备指示UE发送上行参考信号。进一步地,第一网络设备可以通过切换指示消息指示UE将第一网络设备作为一个服务小区,并与第一网络侧的节点进行数据通信,从而能够完成第二网络设备至第一网络设备的切换,保证UE的业务的连续性。It can be seen that the first network device in the embodiment of the present application can send the time-frequency resource configuration of the DCID and the uplink reference signal to the second network device, so that the second network device can be used to instruct the UE to send the uplink reference signal. Further, the first network device may instruct the UE to use the first network device as a serving cell by using the handover indication message, and perform data communication with the node on the first network side, so as to complete the handover of the second network device to the first network device. To ensure the continuity of the UE's business.
图12是本申请实施例的小区切换的另一个示意性流程图。图13所示的方法包括:FIG. 12 is another schematic flowchart of cell handover in the embodiment of the present application. The method shown in Figure 13 includes:
S401,UE接收当前服务小区的第二网络设备发送的第一RRC配置消息,所述第一RRC配置消息包括DCID,所述DCID用于第一网络设备标识所述UE。S401. The UE receives a first RRC configuration message sent by a second network device of the current serving cell, where the first RRC configuration message includes a DCID, where the DCID is used by the first network device to identify the UE.
S402,所述UE接收所述第二网络设备发送的第二RRC配置消息,所述第二RRC配置消息包括上行参考信号的时频资源配置。S402. The UE receives a second RRC configuration message sent by the second network device, where the second RRC configuration message includes a time-frequency resource configuration of an uplink reference signal.
S403,所述UE根据所述第一RRC配置消息和所述第二RRC配置消息发送上行参考信号。S403. The UE sends an uplink reference signal according to the first RRC configuration message and the second RRC configuration message.
S404,所述UE接收所述第二网络设备发送的切换命令,所述切换命令包括所述第一网络设备为所述UE所分配的第二节点的标识。S404. The UE receives a handover command sent by the second network device, where the handover command includes an identifier of a second node that is allocated by the first network device to the UE.
S405,所述UE根据所述切换命令,与所述第二节点进行数据传输。S405. The UE performs data transmission with the second node according to the handover command.
可选地,本申请实施例中的第一网络设备为以用户为中心的***中的网络设备,第二网络设备为以网络为中心的***中的网络设备。例如,第一网络设备为前述实施例中的NR控制器,第二网络设备为前述实施例中的eNB,相应地,第一网络设备所在的第一网 络可以为NR。本申请对此不限定。Optionally, the first network device in the embodiment of the present application is a network device in a user-centric system, and the second network device is a network device in a network-centric system. For example, the first network device is the NR controller in the foregoing embodiment, and the second network device is the eNB in the foregoing embodiment, and correspondingly, the first network where the first network device is located The network can be NR. This application is not limited thereto.
可选地,S401和S402可以同时执行,其中,第一RRC配置消息与第二RRC配置消息可以为同一个消息,例如为第一RRC配置消息,此时,第一RRC配置消息包括DCID和上行参考信号的时频资源配置。Optionally, S401 and S402 can be performed at the same time, where the first RRC configuration message and the second RRC configuration message can be the same message, for example, the first RRC configuration message, and the first RRC configuration message includes the DCID and the uplink. Time-frequency resource configuration of the reference signal.
作为一个实施例,在S401之前,可以包括:处于所述第二网络设备服务范围内的所述UE执行异***检测;所述UE根据所述异***检测的结果生成第二测量报告,所述第二测量报告包括第一网络设备所在的第一网络侧的小区ID;所述UE向所述第二网络设备发送所述第二测量报告。As an embodiment, before S401, the method may include: performing, by the UE in the service scope of the second network device, heterogeneous system detection; the UE generating a second measurement report according to the result of the heterogeneous system detection, The second measurement report includes a cell ID of the first network side where the first network device is located; and the UE sends the second measurement report to the second network device.
具体地,UE可以在满足触发条件时,执行所述异***检测;或者,UE可以周期性地执行所述异***检测。Specifically, the UE may perform the heterogeneous system detection when the trigger condition is met; or the UE may periodically perform the heterogeneous system detection.
其中,触发条件可以为:UE检测到的所述第二网络设备的信号质量低于预设的门限。The triggering condition may be that the signal quality of the second network device detected by the UE is lower than a preset threshold.
其中,UE可以接收第二网络设备发送的测量控制消息;并根据所述测量控制消息执行所述异***测量。可选地,该测量控制消息可以包括上述预设的门限,这样,UE可以基于触发条件时执行异***检测。或者,该测量控制消息可以包括周期的大小,这样,UE可以基于该周期执行异***检测。The UE may receive the measurement control message sent by the second network device, and perform the different system measurement according to the measurement control message. Optionally, the measurement control message may include the foregoing preset threshold, so that the UE may perform the heterogeneous system detection based on the trigger condition. Alternatively, the measurement control message may include a size of a period such that the UE may perform heterogeneous system detection based on the period.
具体地,UE执行异***检测,可以包括:UE执行异***检测,并检测到所述第一网络中的第一节点发送的主同步信号PSS、辅同步信号SSS、第一网络的下行参考信号、***信息SI中的至少一项。Specifically, the performing the inter-system detection by the UE may include: performing, by the UE, the inter-system detection, and detecting the primary synchronization signal PSS, the secondary synchronization signal SSS, and the downlink reference signal of the first network sent by the first node in the first network. At least one of the system information SI.
可选地,本申请实施例中的第一节点可以包括第一TPG中的TP,第二节点可以包括第二TPG中的TP。Optionally, the first node in the embodiment of the present application may include a TP in the first TPG, and the second node may include a TP in the second TPG.
另外,本申请实施例中,在S403之前,还可以包括:UE完成与第一网络设备的上行同步。In addition, in the embodiment of the present application, before S403, the method may further include: the UE completing uplink synchronization with the first network device.
可选地,作为一例,在S403之前,UE接收第二网络设备发送的TA值。该TA值是第二网络设备根据第二网络设备与UE之间的第一TA值以及第二网络设备与第一网络设备之间的第二TA值所确定的。Optionally, as an example, before S403, the UE receives the TA value sent by the second network device. The TA value is determined by the second network device according to a first TA value between the second network device and the UE and a second TA value between the second network device and the first network device.
可选地,作为另一例,在S403之前,UE接收第二网络设备发送的TA测试指令;根据所述TA测试指令,UE向所述第一网络设备发送TATA测试消息;并且,UE接收第一网络设备发送的TA值。Optionally, as another example, before S403, the UE receives a TA test command sent by the second network device; according to the TA test command, the UE sends a TATA test message to the first network device; and, the UE receives the first The TA value sent by the network device.
其中,UE可以直接从第一网络设备接收该TA值。或者,UE可以从第二网络设备接收由第一网络设备所确定的TA值。也就是说,可以是第一网络设备将该TA值发送至第二网络设备,再由第二网络设备将该TA值转发至UE。The UE may receive the TA value directly from the first network device. Alternatively, the UE may receive the TA value determined by the first network device from the second network device. That is, the first network device may send the TA value to the second network device, and the second network device forwards the TA value to the UE.
可选地,该TA值可以携带在第二RRC配置消息中。即,第二RRC配置消息可以包括上行参考信号的时频资源配置和TA值。可理解,若第二RRC配置消息与第一RRC配置消息为同一个消息,则第一RRC配置消息可以包括DCID、上行参考信号的时频资源配置和TA值。Optionally, the TA value may be carried in the second RRC configuration message. That is, the second RRC configuration message may include a time-frequency resource configuration and a TA value of the uplink reference signal. It can be understood that if the second RRC configuration message is the same message as the first RRC configuration message, the first RRC configuration message may include a DCID, a time-frequency resource configuration of the uplink reference signal, and a TA value.
可选地,S403中,UE可以基于DCID,使用上行参考信号的时频资源配置,向第一网络设备中的节点发送上行参考信号。例如,第一网络设备所在的第一网络侧中的第一TPG中的TP能够检测到该上行参考信号,并向第一网络设备发送第一测量报告。Optionally, in S403, the UE may send an uplink reference signal to a node in the first network device by using a time-frequency resource configuration of the uplink reference signal based on the DCID. For example, the TP in the first TPG in the first network side where the first network device is located can detect the uplink reference signal and send the first measurement report to the first network device.
可选地,S404中的切换命令可以包括第二节点的标识。进一步地,在S405中,UE 根据该切换命令,与第二节点进行数据传输。例如,第二节点为第二TPG中的TP,则S404中的切换命令可以包括第二TPG的指示信息。相应地,在S405中,UE可以根据该切换命令,与第二TPG中的TP进行数据传输。Optionally, the handover command in S404 may include an identifier of the second node. Further, in S405, the UE According to the switching command, data transmission is performed with the second node. For example, if the second node is a TP in the second TPG, the handover command in S404 may include indication information of the second TPG. Correspondingly, in S405, the UE may perform data transmission with the TP in the second TPG according to the handover command.
可理解,本申请实施例中,UE可以根据切换命令,将第一网络设备所在的第一网络作为UE的一个服务小区;或者,UE可以根据切换指令,将服务小区切换至第一网络设备所在的第一网络。It can be understood that, in the embodiment of the present application, the UE may use the first network where the first network device is located as one serving cell of the UE according to the handover command; or, the UE may switch the serving cell to the first network device according to the handover instruction. The first network.
这样,本申请实施例中的UE可以基于第二网络设备发送DCID和上行参考信号的时频资源配置发送上行参考信息,进而可以基于切换命令完成第二网络设备至第一网络设备的切换,保证了业务的连续性。In this way, the UE in the embodiment of the present application can send the uplink reference information according to the time-frequency resource configuration of the second network device to send the DCID and the uplink reference signal, and further complete the handover of the second network device to the first network device based on the handover command, and ensure The continuity of the business.
图13是本申请实施例的小区切换的另一个示意性流程图。图13所示的方法包括:FIG. 13 is another schematic flowchart of cell handover in the embodiment of the present application. The method shown in Figure 13 includes:
S501,第二网络设备接收第一网络设备发送的DCID和上行参考信号的时频资源配置,其中,所述DCID用于所述第一网络设备标识UE。S501. The second network device receives a time-frequency resource configuration of a DCID and an uplink reference signal sent by the first network device, where the DCID is used by the first network device to identify the UE.
S502,第二网络设备向所述UE发送第一RRC配置消息,所述第一RRC配置消息包括所述DCID。S502. The second network device sends a first RRC configuration message to the UE, where the first RRC configuration message includes the DCID.
S503,第二网络设备向所述UE发送第二RRC配置消息,所述第二RRC配置消息包括上行参考信号的时频资源配置,以使得所述UE根据所述第一RRC配置消息和所述第二RRC配置消息发送上行参考信号。S503. The second network device sends a second RRC configuration message to the UE, where the second RRC configuration message includes a time-frequency resource configuration of the uplink reference signal, so that the UE is configured according to the first RRC configuration message and the The second RRC configuration message sends an uplink reference signal.
可选地,本申请实施例中的第一网络设备为以用户为中心的***中的网络设备,第二网络设备为以网络为中心的***中的网络设备。例如,第一网络设备为前述实施例中的NR控制器,第二网络设备为前述实施例中的eNB,相应地,第一网络设备所在的第一网络可以为NR。本申请对此不限定。Optionally, the first network device in the embodiment of the present application is a network device in a user-centric system, and the second network device is a network device in a network-centric system. For example, the first network device is the NR controller in the foregoing embodiment, and the second network device is the eNB in the foregoing embodiment. Accordingly, the first network where the first network device is located may be the NR. This application is not limited thereto.
可选地,第二网络设备可以接收UE发送的第二测量报告,该第二测量报告包括第一网络设备所在的第一网络的小区ID。这里的小区ID可以是由UE执行异***测量所确定的。进一步地,第二网络设备可以向第一网络设备发送测量请求,并接收该第一网络设备的测量响应,其中,测量响应可以包括DCID和上行参考信号的时频资源配置。可选地,在此之前,第二网络设备可以向UE发送测量控制消息,以使得UE基于该测量控制消息执行异***测量。Optionally, the second network device may receive a second measurement report sent by the UE, where the second measurement report includes a cell ID of the first network where the first network device is located. The cell ID here may be determined by the UE performing an inter-system measurement. Further, the second network device may send a measurement request to the first network device, and receive a measurement response of the first network device, where the measurement response may include a DCID and a time-frequency resource configuration of the uplink reference signal. Optionally, before this, the second network device may send a measurement control message to the UE, so that the UE performs the inter-system measurement based on the measurement control message.
其中,测量请求可以包括切换门限和/或预设时长。The measurement request may include a switching threshold and/or a preset duration.
可见,S501中,第二网络设备可以通过测量响应接收DCID和上行参考信号的时频资源配置。It can be seen that, in S501, the second network device can receive the time-frequency resource configuration of the DCID and the uplink reference signal by measuring the response.
可选地,S502和S503可以同时执行,其中,第一RRC配置消息与第二RRC配置消息可以为同一个消息,例如为第一RRC配置消息,此时,第一RRC配置消息包括DCID和上行参考信号的时频资源配置。也就是说,第二网络设备可以向UE发送第一RRC配置消息,该第一RRC配置消息包括DCID和上行参考信号的时频资源配置,以使得UE根据该DCID和上行参考信号的时频资源配置发送上行参考信号。Optionally, S502 and S503 may be performed at the same time, where the first RRC configuration message and the second RRC configuration message may be the same message, for example, a first RRC configuration message, where the first RRC configuration message includes a DCID and an uplink. Time-frequency resource configuration of the reference signal. That is, the second network device may send a first RRC configuration message to the UE, where the first RRC configuration message includes a time-frequency resource configuration of the DCID and the uplink reference signal, so that the UE according to the DCID and the time-frequency resource of the uplink reference signal Configure to send uplink reference signals.
可选地,作为一例,该方法还可以包括:第二网络设备根据所述第二网络设备与所述UE之间的第一TA值以及所述第二网络设备与所述第一网络设备之间的第二TA值,确定所述UE与所述第一网络设备之间的TA值;并且所述第二网络设备将所述确定的TA值发送至所述UE。 Optionally, the method may further include: the second network device according to the first TA value between the second network device and the UE, and the second network device and the first network device a second TA value, determining a TA value between the UE and the first network device; and the second network device transmitting the determined TA value to the UE.
可选地,作为另一例,该方法还可以包括:第二网络设备接收所述第一网络设备发送的TA值;并且所述第二网络设备将所述TA值发送至所述UE。Optionally, as another example, the method may further include: the second network device receiving the TA value sent by the first network device; and the second network device sending the TA value to the UE.
可选地,作为另一例,该方法还可以包括:第二网络设备接收第一网络设备发送的TA测试指令,第二网络设备将该TA测试指令转发至UE,以使得UE向第一网络设备发送TA测试消息。进一步地,第二网络设备可以接收第一网络设备基于该TA测试消息所确定的TA值,并将该TA值发送至UE。Optionally, as another example, the method may further include: the second network device receives the TA test command sent by the first network device, and the second network device forwards the TA test command to the UE, so that the UE sends the UE to the first network device. Send a TA test message. Further, the second network device may receive the TA value determined by the first network device based on the TA test message, and send the TA value to the UE.
可选地,该TA值可以携带在第二RRC配置消息中,即第二RRC配置消息可以包括上行参考信号的时频资源配置和TA值。可理解,若第二RRC配置消息与第一RRC配置消息为同一个消息,则第一RRC配置消息可以包括DCID、上行参考信号的时频资源配置和TA值。Optionally, the TA value may be carried in the second RRC configuration message, that is, the second RRC configuration message may include a time-frequency resource configuration and a TA value of the uplink reference signal. It can be understood that if the second RRC configuration message is the same message as the first RRC configuration message, the first RRC configuration message may include a DCID, a time-frequency resource configuration of the uplink reference signal, and a TA value.
另外,进一步地,第二网络设备可以接收第一网络设备发送的切换指示信息,该切换指示信息包括第一网络设备所在的第一网络中的第二节点的标识;第二网络设备根据该切换指示信息,向所述UE发送切换命令,所述切换命令包括所述第二节点的标识,所述切换命令用于指示所述UE与所述第二节点进行数据传输。In addition, the second network device may receive the handover indication information sent by the first network device, where the handover indication information includes an identifier of the second node in the first network where the first network device is located; and the second network device is configured according to the handover The indication information is sent to the UE, where the handover command includes an identifier of the second node, where the handover command is used to indicate that the UE performs data transmission with the second node.
其中,第二节点可以为第二TPG中的TP。The second node may be a TP in the second TPG.
其中,可选地,切换指示消息还可以进一步包括:所述第一网络设备为所述UE配置的传输资源信息,和/或,所述第一网络设备为所述UE分配的新的ID。相应地,可以理解,切换命令也可以进一步包括:所述第一网络设备为所述UE配置的传输资源信息,和/或,所述第一网络设备为所述UE分配的新的ID。Optionally, the handover indication message may further include: the transmission resource information configured by the first network device for the UE, and/or the new ID allocated by the first network device to the UE. Correspondingly, the handover command may further include: the transmission resource information configured by the first network device for the UE, and/or the new ID allocated by the first network device to the UE.
可见,本申请实施例中,处于第二网络设备服务范围内的UE,可以由第二网络设备协助完成第二网络设备至第一网络设备的切换,并且可以包括UE的业务的连续性。It can be seen that, in the embodiment of the present application, the UE that is in the service range of the second network device can be assisted by the second network device to complete the handover of the second network device to the first network device, and can include the continuity of the service of the UE.
图14是本申请实施例的网络设备的结构框图。图14所示的网络设备100可以为第一网络设备100,包括发送单元120、接收单元140和处理单元160。FIG. 14 is a structural block diagram of a network device according to an embodiment of the present application. The network device 100 shown in FIG. 14 may be the first network device 100, including the transmitting unit 120, the receiving unit 140, and the processing unit 160.
发送单元120用于:向用户设备UE当前服务小区的第二网络设备发送专用连接标识DCID,以使得所述第二网络设备将所述DCID转发至所述UE,其中,所述DCID用于所述第一网络设备标识所述UE;还用于向所述第二网络设备发送上行参考信号的时频资源配置,以使得所述第二网络设备将所述上行参考信号的时频资源配置转发至所述UE;还用于向所述第二网络设备发送切换指示消息,所述切换指示消息包括所述第一网络设备所在的第一网络中的第二节点的标识,以使得所述UE与所述第二节点进行数据传输。The sending unit 120 is configured to: send, to the second network device that is currently serving the cell of the user equipment UE, a dedicated connection identifier DCID, so that the second network device forwards the DCID to the UE, where the DCID is used by the UE The first network device identifies the UE; and is further configured to send, to the second network device, a time-frequency resource configuration of the uplink reference signal, so that the second network device forwards the time-frequency resource configuration of the uplink reference signal And the UE is further configured to send a handover indication message to the second network device, where the handover indication message includes an identifier of a second node in the first network where the first network device is located, to enable the UE Data transmission with the second node.
可选地,本申请实施例中的第一网络设备为以用户为中心的***中的网络设备,第二网络设备为以网络为中心的***中的网络设备。例如,第一网络设备为前述实施例中的NR控制器,第二网络设备为前述实施例中的eNB,相应地,第一网络设备所在的第一网络可以为NR。本申请对此不限定。Optionally, the first network device in the embodiment of the present application is a network device in a user-centric system, and the second network device is a network device in a network-centric system. For example, the first network device is the NR controller in the foregoing embodiment, and the second network device is the eNB in the foregoing embodiment. Accordingly, the first network where the first network device is located may be the NR. This application is not limited thereto.
作为一例,其中的切换指示消息还可以进一步包括:所述第一网络设备为所述UE配置的传输资源信息,和/或,所述第一网络设备为所述UE分配的新的ID。这样,UE可以根据该传输资源信息与第二节点进行通信。As an example, the handover indication message may further include: transmission resource information configured by the first network device for the UE, and/or a new ID allocated by the first network device to the UE. In this way, the UE can communicate with the second node according to the transmission resource information.
可选地,作为一个实施例,发送单元120,还用于将测量指示消息发送给第一节点,指示所述第一节点测量所述UE发送的上行参考信号,所述测量指示消息携带所述DCID和所述上行参考信号的时频资源配置。接收单元140,用于接收所述第一节点发送的第一 测量报告,所述第一测量报告携带所述UE发送的所述上行参考信号的测量结果。处理单元160,用于根据所述第一节点的第一测量报告,为所述UE分配所述第二节点。Optionally, as an embodiment, the sending unit 120 is further configured to send the measurement indication message to the first node, where the first node is configured to measure an uplink reference signal sent by the UE, where the measurement indication message carries the The DCID and the time-frequency resource configuration of the uplink reference signal. The receiving unit 140 is configured to receive the first sent by the first node And a measurement report, where the first measurement report carries a measurement result of the uplink reference signal sent by the UE. The processing unit 160 is configured to allocate the second node to the UE according to the first measurement report of the first node.
举例来说,上行参考信号的测量结果可以为上行参考信号的信号强度信息。相应地,第一测量报告可以携带UE发送的所述上行参考信号的信号强度信息。For example, the measurement result of the uplink reference signal may be the signal strength information of the uplink reference signal. Correspondingly, the first measurement report may carry signal strength information of the uplink reference signal sent by the UE.
其中,处理单元160可以具体用于:判断所述第一节点的第一测量报告携带的所述测量结果是否满足切换门限;如果所述第一节点的第一测量报告携带的所述测量结果满足所述切换门限,则为所述UE分配所述第二节点。The processing unit 160 may be specifically configured to: determine whether the measurement result carried by the first measurement report of the first node meets a handover threshold; and if the measurement result carried by the first measurement report of the first node is satisfied, And the switching threshold, the second node is allocated to the UE.
可选地,处理单元160可以具体用于:判断在预设时长内的所述第一节点的第一测量报告携带的所述测量结果是否满足所述切换门限。Optionally, the processing unit 160 may be specifically configured to: determine whether the measurement result carried by the first measurement report of the first node within a preset duration satisfies the handover threshold.
本申请实施例中,预设时长和/或切换门限可以是预先设置在第一网络设备中的,或者,可以是从第二网络设备获取的。例如,发送单元120还可以用于从所述第二网络设备接收所述预设时长和/或所述切换门限。In this embodiment, the preset duration and/or the handover threshold may be preset in the first network device, or may be acquired from the second network device. For example, the sending unit 120 may be further configured to receive the preset duration and/or the switching threshold from the second network device.
可选地,作为另一个实施例,接收单元140可以用于:接收所述第二网络设备发送的测量请求。其中,所述DCID和所述上行参考信号的时频资源配置包括在与所述测量请求对应的测量响应中。也就是说,发送单元120可以具体用于向第二网络设备发送测量响应,且该测量响应包括DCID和所述上行参考信号的时频资源配置。Optionally, as another embodiment, the receiving unit 140 may be configured to: receive the measurement request sent by the second network device. The time-frequency resource configuration of the DCID and the uplink reference signal is included in a measurement response corresponding to the measurement request. That is, the sending unit 120 may be specifically configured to send a measurement response to the second network device, and the measurement response includes a DCID and a time-frequency resource configuration of the uplink reference signal.
本申请实施例中,在UE发送上行参考信号之前,还可以完成UE与第一网络设备的上行同步。In the embodiment of the present application, before the UE sends the uplink reference signal, the uplink synchronization between the UE and the first network device may also be completed.
可选地,作为一例,接收单元140可以用于接收所述第二网络设备发送的TA值。这里的TA值可以是第二网络设备自行确定的,例如,可以是第二网络设备根据第二网络设备与UE之间的第一TA值以及第二网络设备与第一网络设备之间的第二TA值所确定的。Optionally, as an example, the receiving unit 140 may be configured to receive a TA value sent by the second network device. The value of the TA may be determined by the second network device, for example, may be the first network value between the second network device and the UE, and the first between the second network device and the first network device. The two TA values are determined.
可选地,作为另一例,发送单元120可以用于向所述第二网络设备发送TA测试指令,以便于所述第二网络设备指示所述UE发送TA测试消息。接收单元140可以用于接收所述UE发送的所述TA测试消息。处理单元160可以用于根据所述TA测试消息,确定TA值。发送单元120还可以用于将所述TA值发送至所述UE。也就是说,这里的TA值可以是第一网络设备基于TA测试消息所确定的。Optionally, as another example, the sending unit 120 may be configured to send a TA test instruction to the second network device, so that the second network device instructs the UE to send a TA test message. The receiving unit 140 may be configured to receive the TA test message sent by the UE. The processing unit 160 may be configured to determine a TA value according to the TA test message. The sending unit 120 is further configured to send the TA value to the UE. That is, the TA value here may be determined by the first network device based on the TA test message.
其中,发送单元120将所述TA值发送至所述UE,可以是:将所述TA值发送至所述第二网络设备,以使得所述第二网络设备将所述TA值转发至所述UE。The sending unit 120 sends the TA value to the UE, where the TA value is sent to the second network device, so that the second network device forwards the TA value to the UE.
应注意,本申请实施例中,发送单元120可以由发送器实现,接收单元140可以由接收器实现,处理单元160可以由处理器实现,如图15所示,该第一网络设备100可以包括处理器110、发送器130、接收器150和存储器170。其中,存储器170可以用于存储处理器110执行的代码等。It should be noted that, in the embodiment of the present application, the sending unit 120 may be implemented by a transmitter, the receiving unit 140 may be implemented by a receiver, and the processing unit 160 may be implemented by a processor. As shown in FIG. 15, the first network device 100 may include The processor 110, the transmitter 130, the receiver 150, and the memory 170. The memory 170 can be used to store code and the like executed by the processor 110.
该第一网络设备100中的各个组件通过总线***190耦合在一起,其中总线***190除包括数据总线之外,还包括电源总线、控制总线和状态信号总线。The various components in the first network device 100 are coupled together by a bus system 190, which in addition to the data bus includes a power bus, a control bus, and a status signal bus.
图14所示的网络设备100或图15所示的网络设备100能够实现前述图1至图13的方法实施例中由NR控制器或第一网络设备执行的各个过程,为避免重复,这里不再赘述。The network device 100 shown in FIG. 14 or the network device 100 shown in FIG. 15 can implement the processes performed by the NR controller or the first network device in the foregoing method embodiments of FIG. 1 to FIG. 13, in order to avoid repetition, here is not Let me repeat.
图16是本申请实施例的UE的结构框图。图16所示的UE 200可以包括接收单元220、发送单元240和处理单元260。FIG. 16 is a structural block diagram of a UE according to an embodiment of the present application. The UE 200 shown in FIG. 16 may include a receiving unit 220, a transmitting unit 240, and a processing unit 260.
接收单元220,用于接收当前服务小区的第二网络设备发送的第一RRC配置消息, 所述第一RRC配置消息包括DCID,所述DCID用于第一网络设备标识所述UE;接收单元220,还用于接收所述第二网络设备发送的第二RRC配置消息,所述第二RRC配置消息包括上行参考信号的时频资源配置;The receiving unit 220 is configured to receive a first RRC configuration message sent by the second network device of the current serving cell, where The first RRC configuration message includes a DCID, where the DCID is used by the first network device to identify the UE, and the receiving unit 220 is further configured to receive a second RRC configuration message sent by the second network device, where the second The RRC configuration message includes a time-frequency resource configuration of the uplink reference signal;
发送单元240,用于根据所述第一RRC配置消息和所述第二RRC配置消息发送上行参考信号;The sending unit 240 is configured to send an uplink reference signal according to the first RRC configuration message and the second RRC configuration message;
接收单元220,还用于接收所述第二网络设备发送的切换命令,所述切换命令包括所述第一网络设备为所述UE所分配的第二节点的标识;The receiving unit 220 is further configured to receive a handover command sent by the second network device, where the handover command includes an identifier of the second node that is allocated by the first network device to the UE;
处理单元260,用于根据所述切换命令,与所述第二节点进行数据传输。The processing unit 260 is configured to perform data transmission with the second node according to the switching command.
可选地,本申请实施例中的第一网络设备为以用户为中心的***中的网络设备,第二网络设备为以网络为中心的***中的网络设备。例如,第一网络设备为前述实施例中的NR控制器,第二网络设备为前述实施例中的eNB,相应地,第一网络设备所在的第一网络可以为NR。本申请对此不限定。Optionally, the first network device in the embodiment of the present application is a network device in a user-centric system, and the second network device is a network device in a network-centric system. For example, the first network device is the NR controller in the foregoing embodiment, and the second network device is the eNB in the foregoing embodiment. Accordingly, the first network where the first network device is located may be the NR. This application is not limited thereto.
可选地,作为一个实施例,处理单元260还可以用于:执行异***检测;并根据所述异***检测的结果生成第二测量报告,所述第二测量报告包括第一网络设备所在的第一网络的小区ID。发送单元240还可以用于向所述第二网络设备发送所述第二测量报告。Optionally, as an embodiment, the processing unit 260 is further configured to: perform a different system detection; and generate a second measurement report according to the result of the different system detection, where the second measurement report includes where the first network device is located. The cell ID of the first network. The sending unit 240 is further configured to send the second measurement report to the second network device.
其中,作为一例,处理单元260可以具体用于:在满足触发条件时,执行所述异***检测;或者,周期性地执行所述异***检测。触发条件可以为:所述处理单元260检测到的所述第二网络设备的信号质量低于预设的门限。For example, the processing unit 260 may be specifically configured to: when the trigger condition is met, perform the heterogeneous system detection; or periodically perform the heterogeneous system detection. The triggering condition may be that the signal quality of the second network device detected by the processing unit 260 is lower than a preset threshold.
可选地,作为另一个实施例,接收单元220还可以用于接收所述第二网络设备发送的测量控制消息。处理单元260可以具体用于根据所述测量控制消息执行所述异***测量。随后,处理单元260可以根据所述异***检测的结果生成第二测量报告。并由发送单元240将所述第二测量报告发送至所述第二网络设备。Optionally, in another embodiment, the receiving unit 220 is further configured to receive a measurement control message sent by the second network device. The processing unit 260 may be specifically configured to perform the different system measurement according to the measurement control message. Subsequently, the processing unit 260 may generate a second measurement report according to the result of the different system detection. And sending, by the sending unit 240, the second measurement report to the second network device.
上述所说的处理单元260执行异***检测可以是:执行异***检测,并检测到所述第一网络中的第一节点发送的主同步信号PSS、辅同步信号SSS、第一网络的下行参考信号、***信息SI中的至少一项。The processing unit 260 performing the heterogeneous system detection may be: performing the heterogeneous system detection, and detecting the primary synchronization signal PSS, the secondary synchronization signal SSS, and the downlink reference of the first network sent by the first node in the first network. At least one of the signal and system information SI.
另外,本申请实施例中,在UE发送上行参考信号之前,还可以完成与第一网络设备之间的上行同步。In addition, in the embodiment of the present application, before the UE sends the uplink reference signal, uplink synchronization with the first network device may also be completed.
可选地,作为一例,接收单元220还可以用于接收所述第二网络设备发送的TA值。其中,TA值可以是第二网络设备自行确定的,或者可以是第二网络设备从第一网络设备接收的。Optionally, as an example, the receiving unit 220 is further configured to receive a TA value sent by the second network device. The TA value may be determined by the second network device, or may be received by the second network device from the first network device.
可选地,作为另一例,接收单元220可以接收第二网络设备发送的TA测试指令。根据该TA测试指令,发送单元240所述第一网络设备发送TA测试消息。接收单元220进一步接收所述第一网络设备发送的TA值。Optionally, as another example, the receiving unit 220 may receive the TA test command sent by the second network device. According to the TA test command, the sending unit 240 sends the TA test message to the first network device. The receiving unit 220 further receives the TA value sent by the first network device.
举例来说,该TA值可以是由第一网络设备发送至第二网络设备,再由第二网络设备发送至UE的。For example, the TA value may be sent by the first network device to the second network device and then sent by the second network device to the UE.
作为一例,所述TA值可以包括在第二网络设备所发送的第二RRC配置消息中。也就是说,接收单元220接收第二网络设备发送的第二RRC配置消息,且该第二RRC配置消息可以包括上行参考信号的时频资源配置和TA值。As an example, the TA value may be included in a second RRC configuration message sent by the second network device. That is, the receiving unit 220 receives the second RRC configuration message sent by the second network device, and the second RRC configuration message may include a time-frequency resource configuration and a TA value of the uplink reference signal.
另外,作为另一种实现方式,所述第一RRC配置消息与第二RRC配置消息为同一个 消息。可见,第一RRC配置消息可以包括DCID和上行参考信号的时频资源配置;或者,第一RRC配置消息可以包括DCID、上行参考信号的时频资源配置和TA值。In addition, as another implementation manner, the first RRC configuration message is the same as the second RRC configuration message. Message. It can be seen that the first RRC configuration message may include a time-frequency resource configuration of the DCID and the uplink reference signal; or the first RRC configuration message may include a DCID, a time-frequency resource configuration of the uplink reference signal, and a TA value.
应注意,本申请实施例中,接收单元220可以由接收器实现,发送单元240可以由发送器实现,处理单元260可以由处理器实现,如图17所示,该UE 200可以包括处理器210、发送器230、接收器250和存储器270。其中,存储器270可以用于存储处理器210执行的代码等。It should be noted that, in the embodiment of the present application, the receiving unit 220 may be implemented by a receiver, the sending unit 240 may be implemented by a transmitter, and the processing unit 260 may be implemented by a processor. As shown in FIG. 17, the UE 200 may include the processor 210. Transmitter 230, receiver 250, and memory 270. The memory 270 can be used to store code and the like executed by the processor 210.
该UE 200中的各个组件通过总线***290耦合在一起,其中总线***290除包括数据总线之外,还包括电源总线、控制总线和状态信号总线。The various components of the UE 200 are coupled together by a bus system 290, which in addition to the data bus includes a power bus, a control bus, and a status signal bus.
图16所示的UE 200或图17所示的UE 200能够实现前述图1至图13的方法实施例中由UE执行的各个过程,为避免重复,这里不再赘述。The UE 200 shown in FIG. 16 or the UE 200 shown in FIG. 17 can implement the processes performed by the UE in the foregoing method embodiments of FIG. 1 to FIG. 13 . To avoid repetition, details are not described herein again.
图18是本申请实施例的网络设备的结构框图。图18所示的网络设备300可以为第二网络设备300,可以包括接收单元320、发送单元340和处理单元360。FIG. 18 is a structural block diagram of a network device according to an embodiment of the present application. The network device 300 shown in FIG. 18 may be the second network device 300, and may include a receiving unit 320, a sending unit 340, and a processing unit 360.
接收单元320,用于接收第一网络设备发送的DCID和上行参考信号的时频资源配置,其中,所述DCID用于所述第一网络设备标识UE。The receiving unit 320 is configured to receive a time-frequency resource configuration of a DCID and an uplink reference signal sent by the first network device, where the DCID is used by the first network device to identify the UE.
发送单元340,用于向所述UE发送第一RRC配置消息,所述第一RRC配置消息包括所述DCID。发送单元340,还用于向所述UE发送第二RRC配置消息,所述第二RRC配置消息包括上行参考信号的时频资源配置,以使得所述UE根据所述第一RRC配置消息和所述第二RRC配置消息发送上行参考信号。The sending unit 340 is configured to send a first RRC configuration message to the UE, where the first RRC configuration message includes the DCID. The sending unit 340 is further configured to send a second RRC configuration message to the UE, where the second RRC configuration message includes a time-frequency resource configuration of the uplink reference signal, so that the UE is configured according to the first RRC configuration message and the The second RRC configuration message sends an uplink reference signal.
可选地,本申请实施例中的第一网络设备为以用户为中心的***中的网络设备,第二网络设备为以网络为中心的***中的网络设备。例如,第一网络设备为前述实施例中的NR控制器,第二网络设备为前述实施例中的eNB,相应地,第一网络设备所在的第一网络可以为NR。本申请对此不限定。Optionally, the first network device in the embodiment of the present application is a network device in a user-centric system, and the second network device is a network device in a network-centric system. For example, the first network device is the NR controller in the foregoing embodiment, and the second network device is the eNB in the foregoing embodiment. Accordingly, the first network where the first network device is located may be the NR. This application is not limited thereto.
可选地,作为一例,接收单元320,还可以用于接收所述UE发送的第二测量报告,所述第二测量报告包括第一网络设备所在的第一网络的小区ID。发送单元340,还用于向所述第一网络设备发送测量请求。接收单元320,还用于接收所述第一网络设备发送的测量响应,所述测量响应包括所述DCID和上行参考信号的时频资源配置。Optionally, as an example, the receiving unit 320 is further configured to receive a second measurement report sent by the UE, where the second measurement report includes a cell ID of the first network where the first network device is located. The sending unit 340 is further configured to send a measurement request to the first network device. The receiving unit 320 is further configured to receive a measurement response sent by the first network device, where the measurement response includes a time-frequency resource configuration of the DCID and an uplink reference signal.
可选地,作为另一例,发送单元340还可以用于向所述UE发送测量控制消息,以指示所述UE进行异***测量。接收单元320,还可以用于接收所述UE发送的第二测量报告,所述第二测量报告包括第一网络设备所在的第一网络的小区ID。发送单元340,还用于向所述第一网络设备发送测量请求。接收单元320,还用于接收所述第一网络设备发送的测量响应,所述测量响应包括所述DCID和上行参考信号的时频资源配置。Optionally, as another example, the sending unit 340 is further configured to send a measurement control message to the UE to instruct the UE to perform an inter-system measurement. The receiving unit 320 is further configured to receive a second measurement report sent by the UE, where the second measurement report includes a cell ID of the first network where the first network device is located. The sending unit 340 is further configured to send a measurement request to the first network device. The receiving unit 320 is further configured to receive a measurement response sent by the first network device, where the measurement response includes a time-frequency resource configuration of the DCID and an uplink reference signal.
其中,所述测量请求可以包括切换门限,或者,所述测量请求可以包括切换门限和预设时长。The measurement request may include a handover threshold, or the measurement request may include a handover threshold and a preset duration.
可选地,作为一个实施例,处理单元360可以用于根据所述第二网络设备与所述UE之间的第一TA值以及所述第二网络设备与所述第一网络设备之间的第二TA值,确定所述UE与所述第一网络设备之间的第三TA值。发送单元340还用于将所述确定的第三TA值发送至所述UE。可理解,这里的第三TA值为UE与第一网络设备之间的TA值。Optionally, as an embodiment, the processing unit 360 may be configured to: according to a first TA value between the second network device and the UE, and between the second network device and the first network device a second TA value determining a third TA value between the UE and the first network device. The sending unit 340 is further configured to send the determined third TA value to the UE. It can be understood that the third TA value here is the TA value between the UE and the first network device.
可选地,作为另一个实施例,接收单元320可以用于接收所述第一网络设备发送的TA值。发送单元340可以用于将所述TA值发送至所述UE。 Optionally, as another embodiment, the receiving unit 320 may be configured to receive a TA value sent by the first network device. The sending unit 340 can be configured to send the TA value to the UE.
可选地,作为另一个实施例,接收单元320可以用于接收第一网络设备发送的TA测试指令。发送单元340可以用于向所述UE发送TA测试指令,以指示所述UE向所述第一网络设备发送TA测试消息。进一步地,接收单元320可以用于接收所述第一网络设备发送的TA值。发送单元340可以用于将所述TA值发送至所述UE。其中,TA值可以是第一网络设备基于TA测试消息所确定的。Optionally, as another embodiment, the receiving unit 320 may be configured to receive a TA test instruction sent by the first network device. The sending unit 340 can be configured to send a TA test instruction to the UE to instruct the UE to send a TA test message to the first network device. Further, the receiving unit 320 may be configured to receive a TA value sent by the first network device. The sending unit 340 can be configured to send the TA value to the UE. The TA value may be determined by the first network device based on the TA test message.
其中,发送单元340所发送的TA值可以包括在所述第二RRC配置消息中。也就是说,发送单元340可以向UE发送第二RRC配置消息,该第二RRC配置消息包括上行参考信号的时频资源配置和TA值。The TA value sent by the sending unit 340 may be included in the second RRC configuration message. That is, the sending unit 340 may send a second RRC configuration message to the UE, where the second RRC configuration message includes a time-frequency resource configuration and a TA value of the uplink reference signal.
另外,作为另一种实现方式,所述第一RRC配置消息与第二RRC配置消息为同一个消息。可见,第一RRC配置消息可以包括DCID和上行参考信号的时频资源配置;或者,第一RRC配置消息可以包括DCID、上行参考信号的时频资源配置和TA值。In addition, as another implementation manner, the first RRC configuration message and the second RRC configuration message are the same message. It can be seen that the first RRC configuration message may include a time-frequency resource configuration of the DCID and the uplink reference signal; or the first RRC configuration message may include a DCID, a time-frequency resource configuration of the uplink reference signal, and a TA value.
可选地,本申请实施例中,接收单元320,还可以用于接收所述第一网络设备发送的切换指示信息,所述切换指示消息包括所述第一网络设备所在的第一网络中的第二节点的标识。发送单元340,还可以用于根据所述切换指示信息,向所述UE发送切换命令,所述切换命令包括所述第二节点的标识,所述切换命令用于指示所述UE与所述第二节点进行数据传输。Optionally, in the embodiment of the present application, the receiving unit 320 is further configured to receive the handover indication information that is sent by the first network device, where the handover indication message includes the first network where the first network device is located. The identity of the second node. The sending unit 340 is further configured to send, according to the handover indication information, a handover command to the UE, where the handover command includes an identifier of the second node, where the handover command is used to indicate the UE and the first Two nodes perform data transmission.
其中,切换指示消息还可以进一步包括:所述第一网络设备为所述UE配置的传输资源信息,和/或,所述第一网络设备为所述UE分配的新的ID。The handover indication message may further include: transmission resource information configured by the first network device for the UE, and/or a new ID allocated by the first network device to the UE.
应注意,本申请实施例中,接收单元320可以由接收器实现,发送单元340可以由发送器实现,处理单元360可以由处理器实现,如图19所示,该网络设备300可以包括处理器310、发送器330、接收器350和存储器370。其中,存储器370可以用于存储处理器310执行的代码等。It should be noted that, in the embodiment of the present application, the receiving unit 320 may be implemented by a receiver, the sending unit 340 may be implemented by a transmitter, and the processing unit 360 may be implemented by a processor. As shown in FIG. 19, the network device 300 may include a processor. 310, a transmitter 330, a receiver 350, and a memory 370. Among them, the memory 370 can be used to store code and the like executed by the processor 310.
该网络设备300中的各个组件通过总线***390耦合在一起,其中总线***390除包括数据总线之外,还包括电源总线、控制总线和状态信号总线。The various components in the network device 300 are coupled together by a bus system 390, which in addition to the data bus includes a power bus, a control bus, and a status signal bus.
图18所示的网络设备300或图19所示的网络设备300能够实现前述图1至图13的方法实施例中由eNB或第二网络设备执行的各个过程,为避免重复,这里不再赘述。The network device 300 shown in FIG. 18 or the network device 300 shown in FIG. 19 can implement the processes performed by the eNB or the second network device in the foregoing method embodiments of FIG. 1 to FIG. .
图20是本申请实施例的***芯片的示意性结构图。图20的***芯片400包括输入接口410、输出接口420、至少一个处理器430、存储器440,所述输入接口410、输出接口420、所述处理器430以及存储器440之间通过总线相连,所述处理器430用于执行所述存储器440中的代码,当所述代码被执行时,所述处理器430实现图1-10中由NR控制器或第一网络设备执行的方法。FIG. 20 is a schematic structural diagram of a system chip according to an embodiment of the present application. The system chip 400 of FIG. 20 includes an input interface 410, an output interface 420, at least one processor 430, and a memory 440. The input interface 410, the output interface 420, the processor 430, and the memory 440 are connected by a bus. The processor 430 is configured to execute code in the memory 440, and when the code is executed, the processor 430 implements the method of FIG. 1-10 performed by the NR controller or the first network device.
图21是本申请实施例的***芯片的示意性结构图。图21的***芯片500包括输入接口510、输出接口520、至少一个处理器530、存储器540,所述输入接口510、输出接口520、所述处理器530以及存储器540之间通过总线相连,所述处理器530用于执行所述存储器540中的代码,当所述代码被执行时,所述处理器530实现图1-10中由UE执行的方法。FIG. 21 is a schematic structural diagram of a system chip according to an embodiment of the present application. The system chip 500 of FIG. 21 includes an input interface 510, an output interface 520, at least one processor 530, and a memory 540. The input interface 510, the output interface 520, the processor 530, and the memory 540 are connected by a bus. The processor 530 is configured to execute code in the memory 540, and when the code is executed, the processor 530 implements the method performed by the UE in FIGS. 1-10.
图22是本申请实施例的***芯片的示意性结构图。图22的***芯片600包括输入接口610、输出接口620、至少一个处理器630、存储器640,所述输入接口610、输出接口620、所述处理器630以及存储器640之间通过总线相连,所述处理器630用于执行所述 存储器640中的代码,当所述代码被执行时,所述处理器630实现图1-10中由eNB或第二网络设备执行的方法。FIG. 22 is a schematic structural diagram of a system chip according to an embodiment of the present application. The system chip 600 of FIG. 22 includes an input interface 610, an output interface 620, at least one processor 630, and a memory 640. The input interface 610, the output interface 620, the processor 630, and the memory 640 are connected by a bus. The processor 630 is configured to execute the The code in memory 640, when the code is executed, the processor 630 implements the method of Figure 1-10 performed by an eNB or a second network device.
本文中术语“和/或”,仅仅是一种描述关联对象的关联关系,表示可以存在三种关系,例如,A和/或B,可以表示:单独存在A,同时存在A和B,单独存在B这三种情况。另外,本文中字符“/”,一般表示前后关联对象是一种“或”的关系。The term "and/or" in this context is merely an association describing the associated object, indicating that there may be three relationships, for example, A and / or B, which may indicate that A exists separately, and both A and B exist, respectively. B these three situations. In addition, the character "/" in this article generally indicates that the contextual object is an "or" relationship.
本领域普通技术人员可以意识到,结合本文中所公开的实施例描述的各示例的单元及算法步骤,能够以电子硬件、或者计算机软件和电子硬件的结合来实现。这些功能究竟以硬件还是软件方式来执行,取决于技术方案的特定应用和设计约束条件。专业技术人员可以对每个特定的应用来使用不同方法来实现所描述的功能,但是这种实现不应认为超出本申请的范围。Those of ordinary skill in the art will appreciate that the elements and algorithm steps of the various examples described in connection with the embodiments disclosed herein can be implemented in electronic hardware or a combination of computer software and electronic hardware. Whether these functions are performed in hardware or software depends on the specific application and design constraints of the solution. A person skilled in the art can use different methods to implement the described functions for each particular application, but such implementation should not be considered to be beyond the scope of the present application.
所属领域的技术人员可以清楚地了解到,为描述的方便和简洁,上述描述的***、装置和单元的具体工作过程,可以参考前述方法实施例中的对应过程,在此不再赘述。A person skilled in the art can clearly understand that for the convenience and brevity of the description, the specific working process of the system, the device and the unit described above can refer to the corresponding process in the foregoing method embodiment, and details are not described herein again.
以上所述,仅为本申请的具体实施方式,但本申请的保护范围并不局限于此,任何熟悉本技术领域的技术人员在本申请揭露的技术范围内,可轻易想到变化或替换,都应涵盖在本申请的保护范围之内。因此,本申请的保护范围应以权利要求的保护范围为准。 The foregoing is only a specific embodiment of the present application, but the scope of protection of the present application is not limited thereto, and any person skilled in the art can easily think of changes or substitutions within the technical scope disclosed in the present application. It should be covered by the scope of protection of this application. Therefore, the scope of protection of this application should be determined by the scope of protection of the claims.

Claims (29)

  1. 一种用于小区切换的方法,其特征在于,包括:A method for cell handover, comprising:
    第一网络设备向用户设备UE当前服务小区的第二网络设备发送专用连接标识DCID,以使得所述第二网络设备将所述DCID转发至所述UE,其中,所述DCID用于所述第一网络设备标识所述UE;Transmitting, by the first network device, a dedicated connection identifier DCID to the second network device of the current serving cell of the user equipment UE, such that the second network device forwards the DCID to the UE, where the DCID is used by the first a network device identifying the UE;
    所述第一网络设备向所述第二网络设备发送上行参考信号的时频资源配置,以使得所述第二网络设备将所述上行参考信号的时频资源配置转发至所述UE;The first network device sends a time-frequency resource configuration of the uplink reference signal to the second network device, so that the second network device forwards the time-frequency resource configuration of the uplink reference signal to the UE;
    所述第一网络设备向所述第二网络设备发送切换指示消息,所述切换指示消息包括所述第一网络设备所在的第一网络中的第二节点的标识,以使得所述UE与所述第二节点进行数据传输。The first network device sends a handover indication message to the second network device, where the handover indication message includes an identifier of a second node in the first network where the first network device is located, so that the UE and the The second node performs data transmission.
  2. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,在所述第一网络设备向所述第二网络设备发送切换指示消息之前,还包括:The method according to claim 1, wherein before the first network device sends the handover indication message to the second network device, the method further includes:
    所述第一网络设备将测量指示消息发送给第一节点,指示所述第一节点测量所述UE发送的上行参考信号,所述测量指示消息携带所述DCID和/或所述上行参考信号的时频资源配置;Sending, by the first network device, a measurement indication message to the first node, instructing the first node to measure an uplink reference signal sent by the UE, where the measurement indication message carries the DCID and/or the uplink reference signal Time-frequency resource configuration;
    所述第一网络设备接收所述第一节点发送的第一测量报告,所述第一测量报告携带所述UE发送的所述上行参考信号的测量结果;Receiving, by the first network device, a first measurement report sent by the first node, where the first measurement report carries a measurement result of the uplink reference signal sent by the UE;
    所述第一网络设备根据所述第一节点的第一测量报告,为所述UE分配所述第二节点。The first network device allocates the second node to the UE according to the first measurement report of the first node.
  3. 根据权利要求2所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一网络设备根据所述第一节点的第一测量报告,为所述UE分配所述第二节点,包括:The method according to claim 2, wherein the first network device allocates the second node to the UE according to the first measurement report of the first node, including:
    所述第一网络设备判断所述第一节点的第一测量报告携带的所述测量结果是否满足切换门限;Determining, by the first network device, whether the measurement result carried by the first measurement report of the first node meets a handover threshold;
    如果所述第一节点的第一测量报告携带的所述测量结果满足所述切换门限,则所述第一网络设备为所述UE分配所述第二节点,If the measurement result carried by the first measurement report of the first node meets the handover threshold, the first network device allocates the second node to the UE,
    其中,所述切换门限是所述第一网络设备从所述第二网络设备接收的。The switching threshold is received by the first network device from the second network device.
  4. 根据权利要求1至3任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,A method according to any one of claims 1 to 3, characterized in that
    在所述第一网络设备向UE当前服务小区的第二网络设备发送DCID之前,还包括:Before the first network device sends the DCID to the second network device of the current serving cell of the UE, the method further includes:
    所述第一网络设备接收所述第二网络设备发送的测量请求;Receiving, by the first network device, a measurement request sent by the second network device;
    其中,所述DCID和所述上行参考信号的时频资源配置包括在与所述测量请求对应的测量响应中。The time-frequency resource configuration of the DCID and the uplink reference signal is included in a measurement response corresponding to the measurement request.
  5. 根据权利要求1至4任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述切换指示消息还包括:The method according to any one of claims 1 to 4, wherein the handover indication message further comprises:
    所述第一网络设备为所述UE配置的传输资源信息,和/或,所述第一网络设备为所述UE分配的新的ID。The first network device is configured to transmit resource information of the UE, and/or the new ID that the first network device allocates to the UE.
  6. 根据权利要求1至5任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,在所述第一网络设备向所述第二网络设备发送切换指示消息之前,还包括:The method according to any one of claims 1 to 5, further comprising: before the sending, by the first network device, the handover indication message to the second network device,
    所述第一网络设备向所述第二网络设备发送TA测试指令,以便于所述第二网络设备指示所述UE发送TA测试消息; Sending, by the first network device, a TA test instruction to the second network device, so that the second network device instructs the UE to send a TA test message;
    所述第一网络设备接收所述UE发送的所述TA测试消息;Receiving, by the first network device, the TA test message sent by the UE;
    所述第一网络设备根据所述TA测试消息,确定TA值;Determining, by the first network device, a TA value according to the TA test message;
    所述第一网络设备将所述TA值发送至所述UE。The first network device sends the TA value to the UE.
  7. 根据权利要求6所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一网络设备将所述TA值发送至所述UE,包括:The method according to claim 6, wherein the sending, by the first network device, the TA value to the UE comprises:
    所述第一网络设备将所述TA值发送至所述第二网络设备,以使得所述第二网络设备将所述TA值转发至所述UE。The first network device transmits the TA value to the second network device such that the second network device forwards the TA value to the UE.
  8. 一种用于小区切换的方法,其特征在于,包括:A method for cell handover, comprising:
    用户设备UE接收当前服务小区的第二网络设备发送的第一无线资源控制RRC配置消息,所述第一RRC配置消息包括专用连接标识DCID,所述DCID用于第一网络设备标识所述UE;The user equipment UE receives the first radio resource control RRC configuration message sent by the second network device of the current serving cell, where the first RRC configuration message includes a dedicated connection identifier DCID, and the DCID is used by the first network device to identify the UE;
    所述UE接收所述第二网络设备发送的第二RRC配置消息,所述第二RRC配置消息包括上行参考信号的时频资源配置;Receiving, by the UE, a second RRC configuration message sent by the second network device, where the second RRC configuration message includes a time-frequency resource configuration of an uplink reference signal;
    所述UE根据所述第一RRC配置消息和所述第二RRC配置消息发送上行参考信号;Sending, by the UE, an uplink reference signal according to the first RRC configuration message and the second RRC configuration message;
    所述UE接收所述第二网络设备发送的切换命令,所述切换命令包括所述第一网络设备为所述UE所分配的第二节点的标识;Receiving, by the UE, a handover command sent by the second network device, where the handover command includes an identifier of a second node that is allocated by the first network device to the UE;
    所述UE根据所述切换命令,与所述第二节点进行数据传输。The UE performs data transmission with the second node according to the handover command.
  9. 根据权利要求8所述的方法,其特征在于,在所述UE接收当前服务小区的第二网络设备发送的第一RRC配置消息之前,还包括:The method according to claim 8, wherein before the receiving, by the UE, the first RRC configuration message sent by the second network device of the current serving cell, the method further includes:
    处于所述第二网络设备服务范围内的所述UE执行异***检测;The UE in the service range of the second network device performs heterogeneous system detection;
    所述UE根据所述异***检测的结果生成第二测量报告,所述第二测量报告包括第一网络设备所在的第一网络的小区ID;The UE generates a second measurement report according to the result of the detection by the different system, where the second measurement report includes a cell ID of the first network where the first network device is located;
    所述UE向所述第二网络设备发送所述第二测量报告。The UE sends the second measurement report to the second network device.
  10. 根据权利要求9所述的方法,其特征在于,所述UE执行异***检测,包括:The method according to claim 9, wherein the UE performs heterogeneous system detection, including:
    所述UE接收所述第二网络设备发送的测量控制消息;Receiving, by the UE, a measurement control message sent by the second network device;
    所述UE根据所述测量控制消息执行所述异***测量。The UE performs the heterogeneous system measurement according to the measurement control message.
  11. 根据权利要求9或10所述的方法,其特征在于,所述UE执行异***检测,包括:The method according to claim 9 or 10, wherein the UE performs heterogeneous system detection, including:
    所述UE执行异***检测,并检测到所述第一网络中的第一节点发送的主同步信号PSS、辅同步信号SSS、所述第一网络的下行参考信号、***信息SI中的至少一项。The UE performs the inter-system detection, and detects at least one of the primary synchronization signal PSS, the secondary synchronization signal SSS, the downlink reference signal of the first network, and the system information SI sent by the first node in the first network. item.
  12. 根据权利要求8至11任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,在所述UE根据所述第一RRC配置消息和所述第二RRC配置消息发送上行参考信号之前,还包括:The method according to any one of claims 8 to 11, further comprising: before the sending, by the UE, the uplink reference signal according to the first RRC configuration message and the second RRC configuration message,
    所述UE向所述第一网络设备发送时间提前量TA测试消息;Sending, by the UE, a timing advance TA test message to the first network device;
    所述UE接收所述第一网络设备发送的TA值。The UE receives a TA value sent by the first network device.
  13. 根据权利要求12所述的方法,其特征在于,The method of claim 12 wherein:
    所述TA值包括在所述第二RRC配置消息中。The TA value is included in the second RRC configuration message.
  14. 根据权利要求8至11任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,在所述UE根据所述第一RRC配置消息和所述第二RRC配置消息发送上行参考信号之前,还包括:The method according to any one of claims 8 to 11, further comprising: before the sending, by the UE, the uplink reference signal according to the first RRC configuration message and the second RRC configuration message,
    所述UE接收所述第二网络设备发送的TA值。 The UE receives a TA value sent by the second network device.
  15. 根据权利要求8至14任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一RRC配置消息与第二RRC配置消息为同一个消息。The method according to any one of claims 8 to 14, wherein the first RRC configuration message and the second RRC configuration message are the same message.
  16. 一种用于小区切换的方法,其特征在于,包括:A method for cell handover, comprising:
    第二网络设备接收第一网络设备发送的专用连接标识DCID和上行参考信号的时频资源配置,其中,所述DCID用于所述第一网络设备标识用户设备UE;The second network device receives the time-frequency resource configuration of the dedicated connection identifier DCID and the uplink reference signal sent by the first network device, where the DCID is used by the first network device to identify the user equipment UE;
    所述第二网络设备向所述UE发送第一无线资源控制RRC配置消息,所述第一RRC配置消息包括所述DCID;The second network device sends a first radio resource control RRC configuration message to the UE, where the first RRC configuration message includes the DCID;
    所述第二网络设备向所述UE发送第二RRC配置消息,所述第二RRC配置消息包括上行参考信号的时频资源配置,以使得所述UE根据所述第一RRC配置消息和所述第二RRC配置消息发送上行参考信号。The second network device sends a second RRC configuration message to the UE, where the second RRC configuration message includes a time-frequency resource configuration of an uplink reference signal, so that the UE is configured according to the first RRC configuration message and the The second RRC configuration message sends an uplink reference signal.
  17. 根据权利要求16所述的方法,其特征在于,还包括:The method of claim 16 further comprising:
    所述第二网络设备根据所述第二网络设备与所述UE之间的第一时间提前量TA值以及所述第二网络设备与所述第一网络设备之间的第二TA值,确定所述UE与所述第一网络设备之间的第三TA值;Determining, by the second network device, a first time advance TA value between the second network device and the UE, and a second TA value between the second network device and the first network device a third TA value between the UE and the first network device;
    所述第二网络设备将所述确定的第三TA值发送至所述UE。The second network device transmits the determined third TA value to the UE.
  18. 根据权利要求16所述的方法,其特征在于,还包括:The method of claim 16 further comprising:
    所述第二网络设备接收所述第一网络设备发送的TA值;Receiving, by the second network device, a TA value sent by the first network device;
    所述第二网络设备将所述TA值发送至所述UE。The second network device sends the TA value to the UE.
  19. 根据权利要求18所述的方法,其特征在于,所述TA值包括在所述第二RRC配置消息中。The method of claim 18, wherein the TA value is included in the second RRC configuration message.
  20. 根据权利要求16至19任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一RRC配置消息与所述第二RRC配置消息为同一个消息。The method according to any one of claims 16 to 19, wherein the first RRC configuration message and the second RRC configuration message are the same message.
  21. 根据权利要求16或19所述的方法,其特征在于,在所述第二网络设备接收所述第一网络设备发送的所述TA值之前,还包括:The method according to claim 16 or 19, further comprising: before the receiving, by the second network device, the TA value sent by the first network device,
    所述第二网络设备向所述UE发送时间提前量TA测试指令,以指示所述UE向所述第一网络设备发送TA测试消息。The second network device sends a timing advance TA test command to the UE to instruct the UE to send a TA test message to the first network device.
  22. 根据权利要求16至21任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,A method according to any one of claims 16 to 21, wherein
    所述第二网络设备接收第一网络设备发送的DCID和上行参考信号的时频资源配置,包括:The second network device receives the time-frequency resource configuration of the DCID and the uplink reference signal sent by the first network device, including:
    所述第二网络设备接收所述UE发送的第二测量报告,所述第二测量报告包括第一网络设备所在的第一网络的小区ID;Receiving, by the second network device, a second measurement report sent by the UE, where the second measurement report includes a cell ID of a first network where the first network device is located;
    所述第二网络设备向所述第一网络设备发送测量请求;Sending, by the second network device, a measurement request to the first network device;
    所述第二网络设备接收所述第一网络设备发送的测量响应,所述测量响应包括所述DCID和上行参考信号的时频资源配置。The second network device receives a measurement response sent by the first network device, where the measurement response includes a time-frequency resource configuration of the DCID and an uplink reference signal.
  23. 根据权利要求22所述的方法,其特征在于,所述测量请求包括切换门限,或者,所述测量请求包括切换门限和预设时长。The method according to claim 22, wherein the measurement request comprises a handover threshold, or the measurement request comprises a handover threshold and a preset duration.
  24. 根据权利要求22或23所述的方法,其特征在于,在所述第二网络设备接收所述UE发送的第二测量报告之前,还包括:The method according to claim 22 or 23, further comprising: before the second network device receives the second measurement report sent by the UE,
    所述第二网络设备向所述UE发送测量控制消息,以指示所述UE进行异***测量。 The second network device sends a measurement control message to the UE to instruct the UE to perform an inter-system measurement.
  25. 根据权利要求16至24任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,还包括:The method according to any one of claims 16 to 24, further comprising:
    所述第二网络设备接收所述第一网络设备发送的切换指示信息,所述切换指示消息包括所述第一网络设备所在的第一网络中的第二节点的标识;The second network device receives the handover indication information that is sent by the first network device, where the handover indication message includes an identifier of the second node in the first network where the first network device is located;
    所述第二网络设备根据所述切换指示信息,向所述UE发送切换命令,所述切换命令包括所述第二节点的标识,所述切换命令用于指示所述UE与所述第二节点进行数据传输。The second network device sends a handover command to the UE according to the handover indication information, where the handover command includes an identifier of the second node, where the handover command is used to indicate the UE and the second node. Data transfer.
  26. 根据权利要求25所述的方法,其特征在于,所述切换指示消息还包括:The method according to claim 25, wherein the handover indication message further comprises:
    所述第一网络设备为所述UE配置的传输资源信息,和/或,所述第一网络设备为所述UE分配的新的ID。The first network device is configured to transmit resource information of the UE, and/or the new ID that the first network device allocates to the UE.
  27. 一种网络设备,其特征在于,包括:存储器和处理器,A network device, comprising: a memory and a processor,
    所述存储器用于存储所述处理器执行的指令;The memory is configured to store an instruction executed by the processor;
    所述处理器用于执行所述指令以实现权利要求1至7任一项所述的方法。The processor is operative to execute the instructions to implement the method of any one of claims 1 to 7.
  28. 一种用户设备,其特征在于,包括:存储器和处理器,A user equipment, comprising: a memory and a processor,
    所述存储器用于存储所述处理器执行的指令;The memory is configured to store an instruction executed by the processor;
    所述处理器用于执行所述指令以实现权利要求8至15任一项所述的方法。The processor is operative to execute the instructions to implement the method of any one of claims 8 to 15.
  29. 一种网络设备,其特征在于,包括:存储器和处理器,A network device, comprising: a memory and a processor,
    所述存储器用于存储所述处理器执行的指令;The memory is configured to store an instruction executed by the processor;
    所述处理器用于执行所述指令以实现权利要求16至26任一项所述的方法。 The processor is operative to execute the instructions to implement the method of any one of claims 16 to 26.
PCT/CN2017/098026 2016-08-19 2017-08-18 Cell handover method, user equipment, and network device WO2018033136A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN201610692263.2 2016-08-19
CN201610692263.2A CN107770824B (en) 2016-08-19 2016-08-19 Method for cell switching, user equipment and network equipment

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2018033136A1 true WO2018033136A1 (en) 2018-02-22

Family

ID=61196351

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2017/098026 WO2018033136A1 (en) 2016-08-19 2017-08-18 Cell handover method, user equipment, and network device

Country Status (2)

Country Link
CN (1) CN107770824B (en)
WO (1) WO2018033136A1 (en)

Cited By (7)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
TWI682676B (en) * 2018-12-06 2020-01-11 中華電信股份有限公司 Method for handover based on uplink reference signal and wireless communication system
CN111800804A (en) * 2019-04-03 2020-10-20 宏碁股份有限公司 Adaptive measurement setup control technique
CN112865947A (en) * 2018-04-13 2021-05-28 中兴通讯股份有限公司 Measurement interval configuration method and device, storage medium and electronic device
IT201900024000A1 (en) * 2019-12-13 2021-06-13 Telecom Italia Spa Method and system to exploit millimeter wave connections
CN113055963A (en) * 2021-03-30 2021-06-29 联想(北京)有限公司 Information processing method and service equipment of communication network
WO2021226952A1 (en) * 2020-05-14 2021-11-18 Qualcomm Incorporated Prompting wireless service reconnection based on signal change condition
CN114844614A (en) * 2019-08-02 2022-08-02 华为技术有限公司 Method for improving measurement capability of terminal equipment, chip and terminal equipment

Families Citing this family (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN110351789A (en) 2018-04-03 2019-10-18 维沃移动通信有限公司 Method and apparatus for cell transformation
EP3823357B1 (en) 2018-07-20 2022-08-31 Guangdong Oppo Mobile Telecommunications Corp., Ltd. Session management method, terminal device and network device
WO2021003618A1 (en) * 2019-07-05 2021-01-14 Oppo广东移动通信有限公司 Timing advance acquisition method, network device, and terminal device
CN116233949A (en) * 2021-12-03 2023-06-06 华为技术有限公司 Switching method, communication device and communication system
CN117202274A (en) * 2022-05-30 2023-12-08 大唐移动通信设备有限公司 Uplink synchronization method and device and related equipment thereof
CN117241399A (en) * 2022-06-15 2023-12-15 华为技术有限公司 Frequency domain resource allocation method and device

Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN105745852A (en) * 2013-11-21 2016-07-06 华为技术有限公司 Systems and methods for non-cellular wireless access

Family Cites Families (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
KR101487358B1 (en) * 2008-06-30 2015-01-30 인터디지탈 패튼 홀딩스, 인크 Method and apparatus for performing a handover in an evolved universal terrestrial radio access network
JP6424394B2 (en) * 2013-09-26 2018-11-21 シャープ株式会社 Terminal device, base station device, and communication method

Patent Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN105745852A (en) * 2013-11-21 2016-07-06 华为技术有限公司 Systems and methods for non-cellular wireless access

Non-Patent Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
HUAWEI ET AL.: "RRM Measurement for NR", 3GPPTSG RAN WG1 MEETING #86 RL-167200, 12 August 2016 (2016-08-12), XP051142223 *
HUAWEI ET AL.: "UE centric design for NR", 3GPP TSG-RAN WG2 MEETING #95 R2-165439., 13 August 2016 (2016-08-13), XP051134190 *
HUAWEI ET AL.: "UE mobility tracking in ''active state'' and in '' power saving'' state", 3GPP TSG-RAN2 MEETING #94 R2-164129, 13 May 2016 (2016-05-13), XP051095266 *
HUAWEI: "Discussion on LTE-NR handover", 3GPP TSG-RAN WG2 MEETING #95 R2-165450, 13 August 2016 (2016-08-13), XP051134196 *

Cited By (10)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN112865947A (en) * 2018-04-13 2021-05-28 中兴通讯股份有限公司 Measurement interval configuration method and device, storage medium and electronic device
CN112865947B (en) * 2018-04-13 2023-09-26 中兴通讯股份有限公司 Configuration method and device of measurement interval, storage medium and electronic device
US11974239B2 (en) 2018-04-13 2024-04-30 Zte Corporation Measurement gap configuration method and device, storage medium, and electronic device
TWI682676B (en) * 2018-12-06 2020-01-11 中華電信股份有限公司 Method for handover based on uplink reference signal and wireless communication system
CN111800804A (en) * 2019-04-03 2020-10-20 宏碁股份有限公司 Adaptive measurement setup control technique
CN114844614A (en) * 2019-08-02 2022-08-02 华为技术有限公司 Method for improving measurement capability of terminal equipment, chip and terminal equipment
IT201900024000A1 (en) * 2019-12-13 2021-06-13 Telecom Italia Spa Method and system to exploit millimeter wave connections
WO2021116245A1 (en) * 2019-12-13 2021-06-17 Telecom Italia S.P.A. Method and system for exploiting millimeter-wave connections
WO2021226952A1 (en) * 2020-05-14 2021-11-18 Qualcomm Incorporated Prompting wireless service reconnection based on signal change condition
CN113055963A (en) * 2021-03-30 2021-06-29 联想(北京)有限公司 Information processing method and service equipment of communication network

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN107770824A (en) 2018-03-06
CN107770824B (en) 2020-03-10

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
WO2018033136A1 (en) Cell handover method, user equipment, and network device
US10869272B2 (en) Communication method and apparatus applied to hyper cell
EP3477996B1 (en) Network with d2d terminals
US11082895B2 (en) Subband switching method, device, and system
RU2668071C1 (en) Communication optimization method and device
US10764806B2 (en) Method and apparatus for assisting terminal in measuring
EP3413623B1 (en) Communication method and apparatus applied to super cell
EP3809756B1 (en) Mobility management methods, apparatus, communications system and computer-readable storage medium
WO2020154870A1 (en) Wireless communication method, terminal device and network device
US10708838B2 (en) Method and apparatus for transmitting data
WO2014176780A1 (en) Measurement method, measurement control method and device
WO2019024812A1 (en) Neighboring cell measuring method and apparatus
KR20150065874A (en) Method for switching device-to-device communication, base station, and communication system
WO2022068797A1 (en) Network access method, network access apparatus, terminal, and network side device
TW201815194A (en) Communication method, terminal device and network device
US10278101B2 (en) Cell discovery method and apparatus
WO2023087907A1 (en) Sidelink switching method and apparatus, and terminal, storage medium and program product
WO2017148379A1 (en) Communication method and apparatus applied to supercell
WO2022022082A1 (en) Communication method and communication apparatus
CN114258058A (en) Measuring method, measuring device, terminal and network equipment
WO2022068728A1 (en) Configuration method and apparatus, and terminal and network side device
RU2722418C2 (en) Alarm optimization method and device
EP4080913A1 (en) Communication method and apparatus
WO2023282353A1 (en) Communication device, base station, and communication method
JP2023010465A (en) User equipment, base station, and communication control method

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 17841108

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 17841108

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1